JP2018068802A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features on display means.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises display means capable of displaying a presentation setting display including one (1) or a plurality of settings. While the presentation setting display is being displayed, besides the presentation setting display being displayed, a first display including the one (1) setting can be displayed in the display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game tables having display means such as a liquid crystal display device are widely known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an effect setting display, and the effect setting display is a display including one or more settings. In the display of the effect setting display, a display including one setting (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) can be displayed on the display means separately from the effect setting display being displayed. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of the usual stop symbol pattern is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 1, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 3, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 7, and the item provision production in time series. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 8, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 10, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button production. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 38. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of a pseudo-continuous production. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 42. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of reservation consecutive resort notice effect performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of button repeated operation effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 58. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows another example of a decoration symbol, (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the symbol used as the chance of a prefetch notice. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 61. FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 64. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 65. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of button production. (A) is a figure shown about the other example of the button production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, and (B) is other than the pseudo-continuous production performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown about the example of. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button production in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a timer notice effect. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface. The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  In the approximate center of the game area 124, a decorative symbol display device 208 having a display area R1 is disposed. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is a partial area in the present embodiment. In the lower right area of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The display area R1 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208d. The display area 208c displays different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for the effect.

  Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to a high probability state and turns off when switching from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a meter increase entrance 227, a general start port 228, a first special figure start port 230, and a second special figure start port. 231 and 232 and variable prize-winning ports 234 and 235 are provided. In the case of this embodiment, the 1st special figure starting port 230 and the 2nd special figure starting port 231 are provided in the starting port unit U1. The start opening unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game balls that have entered from the upper part to the first special figure start opening 230 or the second special figure start opening 231. In the case of this embodiment, the variable prize opening 234 and 235 are provided in the variable prize opening unit U2. In addition, the number, the position, and the like of the meter increase entrance 227 according to the present embodiment are not limited to this example, and for example, two or more meter increase entrances 227 may be provided, It may be arranged at other places in the game area 124, or a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special figure starting opening 231; 232) may have the same function as the meter increase entrance 227.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is placed on the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second starting port 232 is arranged below the general drawing starting port 228. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 231 or 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is placed on the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The variable winning opening 235 also has a mechanism that can be opened and closed. During closing, it is impossible to enter a ball. For example, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a certain time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. As a result, there is a case where V is won.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged, and any winning opening or starting point is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204. After guiding a ball that has not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out port 240 is provided for discharging to the amusement island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the start opening (first special figure start opening 230, second special figure start opening 231 and 232), or does not win any winning opening or start opening, or only passes through the normal drawing start opening 228 To reach the outlet 240.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, The display control of the drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common figure display device 210 is performed. Drive control 326 and various state display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) are controlled. And a driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  In FIG. 6C, there are two types of stoppage display modes of the normal diagram of the present embodiment: “general map A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment). 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step SA03. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step returns. Proceed to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, the normal return command is the first command in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step SA15, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step SB03, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step SB05, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step SB07 and step SB09, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step SB13, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step SB15, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step SB21, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  In step SB23, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB27.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step SB29), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) (Step SB31). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step SB33, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the bottom pan full error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43. When the low voltage signal is off (power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  In step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step SC01 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step SC01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step SC05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step SC07, processing such as effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed. In step SC13, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step SC09, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step SC15, when there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step SC09, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step SC17, when there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step SC09, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step SC19, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step SC09, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step SC09, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step SE01 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step SC13 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step SF05, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step SG01. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step SG03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05. In step SG05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step SG07, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step SG 11, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has will be described using FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a general term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the items according to the present embodiment are largely classified into two types: custom items and non-custom items. Can be separated. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. Further, the non-custom item cannot be remodeled (customized) on the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100, but is a item that gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give an item to a player when an item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is given, the player performs a setting operation of the given custom item using an effect customization screen (see FIG. 19 (q) or the like) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to modify (customize) the voice, function, various probabilities, etc. according to one's preference. In addition, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a pre-read notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is given. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 according to his / her preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is established and the item is given, a pachinko machine A part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) can be modified (customized) according to his / her preference.

  In addition, when the item granting condition of “heat” is established and the item is given, a notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)” is performed, so that the player Can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a win or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of “Intense heat” is established and the item is assigned, the notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is “Intense heat (expectation is extremely high)” is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit or a possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in association with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 3. In this embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, (10) gauges (scales) are displayed, and one sphere is displayed on the meter increase entrance 227, and each meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one (details) Later).

  By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether the meter gauge is full (predetermined in the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not several (10 in this example) balls have entered. The aspect of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example. For example, even if a ball is lit at the meter increase entrance 227 and a meter gauge is lit (increased) each time it enters, the display is increased. Good.

  Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in relation to the item granting. In this embodiment, when the meter gauge is full (a predetermined number (in this example, the meter increasing entrance 227). In the case of 10 balls), it is determined that the item granting condition has been established, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been given, the type of the item, etc. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item provision effect, the player can grasp that the item has been imparted, the type of the item, and the like. Note that the item granting conditions and item granting effects are not limited to this example. For example, the number and type of items already acquired may be displayed, and the item must be special (for rare items). May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  Example 1 is an example in which an item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). The gaming state shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a state in which a special variation game is being executed (during symbol variation). Further, in this example, there is a special figure variable game held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 3. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. In addition, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of hold of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 by displaying six hold icons PI. 9 gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball is If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. After performing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 11 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 11 (e) to FIG. 11 (g) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 11 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. 11 (i), the item name (item A in this example) and the item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed as information related to the item. (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 11J is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In this example, the button for the period shown in FIG. 11 (j) to FIG. 11 (m) is triggered by displaying information related to the item (in this example, item name and item description) in the item granting effect. Produce.

  In this example, the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the item effect and the change display of the decorative design, so that at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item grant effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and also the decorative display variation item and item There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the provided production.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG that allows specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, whether or not to set an acquired item) and the appearance of a chance button 136 that is valid for accepting operations are simulated. The button image BG1 including the displayed image and a character string that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 (PUSH in this example), and the left and right direction keys (not shown) that can accept operations are simulated. The button image BG2 and the operation effective period display TG including the meter display indicating the period during which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is effective are displayed.

  In such a button effect, when the “Yes” option is provisionally selected and a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 11 (l), as shown in FIG. 11 (m). , By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  The state shown in FIG. 11 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item grant effect is restarted. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 11 (n) to FIG. 11 (p) are triggered by a specific selection (in this example, selection for setting the acquired item) from a plurality of options in the button effect. After displaying the animation including moving the image including the item name step by step from the center of the decorative design display device 208 to the lower display area over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1, it is indicated that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the SP (super) reach variation (the meter gauge is full). In the second embodiment, over the period shown in FIG. 12 (a) to FIG. 12 (b), the special-game variable game develops from normal symbol fluctuation to SP reach fluctuation, and continues to FIG. 12 (c) to FIG. The SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIG.

  During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 12 (e). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 12 (f), a character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effects effects are the same as in Example 1 except that the SP reach variation is in progress, and therefore the same reference numerals are used in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, item granting is performed by displaying a display related to the item granting effect in front of the display and meter related to the SP reach effect over the period shown in FIGS. 12 (h) to (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect overlaps the display related to the SP reach effect and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and also the SP reach effect and meter visibility. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  Moreover, over the period shown in FIG. 12 (k) to FIG. 12 (o), the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed in front of the display regarding the item provision effect, so that at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not hindered, the progress of the variation game can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the effect.

  Further, over the period shown in FIG. 12 (l) to FIG. 12 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative pattern are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. In this way, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative design is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of decorative symbols and button effects are not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time. In addition, there may be a case where the effect of the presentation can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach production or the item provision production.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13: is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production based on Example 3 in time series.

  The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during non-symbol fluctuation (during symbol stop display). The gaming state shown in FIG. 13 (a) is a state in which a special game of variable game is not executed (during non-design fluctuation). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such non-design fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 13 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 13 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effects effects are the same as in Example 1 except that the SP reach variation is in progress, and therefore the same reference numerals are used in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, item display is performed by displaying a display related to the item provision effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIGS. At least a part of the display related to the performance is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the stoppage of the decorative pattern change is also ensured. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14: is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production based on Example 4 in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge gauge is full) while the symbol is not changing (while the symbol is stopped). This is an example. During the non-design variation shown in FIG. 14 (a), as shown in FIG. 14 (b), one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in FIG. 14 (c), it was lit. A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 14 (c), as shown in FIG. 14 (d), based on the fact that the ball entered the start opening (in this example, the first special figure start opening 230). In FIG. 14E, the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 14 (f), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 14 (g). After executing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 14 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 14 (i) to FIG. 14 (k) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 14 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. After performing the animation display, the item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed as shown in FIG. In this item image IG, the item granting condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is “hot (high expectation)” (the winning result of the special figure variable game is It is a win, or the possibility of a win is high).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14 (n), the item granting effect is ended and SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of SP reach, the visibility of SP reach will not be hindered. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increasing mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increasing entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the meter gauge is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a state in which a special variation game is being executed (during symbol variation). In this example, there is a special figure variable game on hold, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 4, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Also, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of seven hold icons PI. 6 gauges are extinguished and 4 gauges GG are turned on, and 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 by the meter increase effect (4 more balls have been added). If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit 4 as shown in FIG. 15 (c). A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 15 (c), as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230), and continues to FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has been increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower display area, the number of holdings of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games) is increased from 7 to 8 due to the display of the eight hold icons PI. It has been shown.

  In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is composed. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase production is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) every time one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 15 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 15 (g), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, the three lights that are lit as shown in FIG. 15 (h) are displayed. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (i), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 15 (j), one lit gauge is turned off. By doing so, while performing the meter increase production in which all 10 gauges are turned off, the right to erase another gauge can be carried over from the next game onward. The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effect effects are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode). A reference numeral is attached and a description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. When the above condition is satisfied, the mode may be shifted to the increase mode, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item granting conditions are met (when the meter gauge is full), the right to erase the meter gauge is carried over after the next game, but it is configured not to carry over. The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 6 in time series.

  The sixth embodiment starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) Then, two types of custom items) are given. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item provision effect, and the effect form of the button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are provided in the item provision effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), after performing animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 16 (i) As shown in the figure, item information (in this example, item A, item B) IN1, IN2 display and item description (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure) Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item provided in an item provision effect may be three or more types.

  The state shown in FIG. 16J is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button production according to this example, a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item A or item B) and operation reception are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the acceptance of the operation is valid. A button image BG2 simulating the appearance of the left and right keys, and an operation valid period display TG including a meter display indicating a period during which the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid. .

  In such a button effect, when the “item A” option is provisionally selected, as shown in FIG. 16 (l), when pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 16 (m). In addition, the selection of “item A” is confirmed by highlighting the selection of “item A” (the selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B has been made). To do.

  The state shown in FIG. 16 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item grant effect is restarted. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 16 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, a selection for setting item A out of acquired item A and item B). (N) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image including the item name over the period shown in FIG. After this, the character display CD3 of “Item A is being set” is performed instead of the character display CD1 of “Item not set”, which indicates that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 7 in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) In this example, a custom item and a non-custom item are given. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item grant effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 17 (h), after performing animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 17 (i) As shown in the figure, as information on two types of items, an item name (in this example, item A) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display, The item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. Note that the non-custom item to be given in the item granting effect may be another non-custom item (for example, pending change, model descriptions 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 17J is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. Since the subsequent item provision effects and the effect aspects of the button effects are the same as in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 17 and the description thereof is omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in time series, and FIG. 20 shows various menus selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen that is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has been detected during non-design variation, and in this example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or a brightness adjustment. Displays a top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen from which various menus can be selected is started.

  Also, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) or the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like is started, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key) or the fifth volume is displayed while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When an operation of the operating means (down key in this example) is received, display of a brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of the various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

  When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume has been increased by one level and that the volume has been increased by one level is displayed. When the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is lowered by one step Execute. When the operation of the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display is executed to increase the brightness by one level and suggest that the brightness has increased by one level. When the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the down key) is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the meter display that indicates that the brightness has decreased by one step and the brightness has decreased by one step is executed. To do.

  Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demo screen is started, and the symbol variation display is started. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / menu screen>
FIG. 18B is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal linked service, initialization, and return to the demonstration screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen, mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19, since the elapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 19A, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (the lower key 161d in this example) is accepted as shown in FIG. 19C during the display of the demonstration screen, FIG. The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted. As shown in the figure, a meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness has decreased by one level and that the brightness has decreased by one level, and as shown in FIG. 19G, the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key 161c). ) Is received, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the luminance is increased by one level and the meter display suggesting that the luminance has increased by one level is executed.

  Subsequently, since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 19 (i), the display is replaced with the brightness adjustment screen. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (k), since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is shown in FIG. 19 (l). As described above, the meter display is executed to suggest that the volume is increased by one level and the volume is decreased by one level.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19 (l) is being displayed, the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 19 (m) is started. Since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted as shown in FIG. 19 (n) during the display of this demonstration screen, the menu screen shown in FIG. 19 (o). Is starting to display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. The display of the production customization screen has started. Further, during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 19 (q), as shown in FIG. 19 (r), the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. In the state where the light display is moved to the next selectable item (in this example, item P) and the item P is temporarily selected, the first operation is performed as shown in FIG. Since the operation of the means (the chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is validated, and the character display “setting item P” is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile device linked service screen>
FIG. 18C is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal linked service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal linked service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 20B, the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in FIG. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1-1) is started, and then new registration is selected on the trial play screen. First, display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1-2) is started.

  Further, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b2), the passwords as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1) and FIG. 20 (b2-1-1). Display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a display of a screen for notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when a correct password is input, display of a screen for notifying completion of password input as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the menu for saving data is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b3), display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-1) is started. When “yes” is selected in FIG. 20, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2) is started, and “end” is selected during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In the case of a failure, display of a confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2-1) is started.

  When the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b4-1) is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 20, display of a completion screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b 4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b5-1) is started, and FIG. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 8>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed (the meter gauge is full). The gaming state shown in FIG. 21A is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-design variation. Also, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  When such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed, when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 21 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by extinguishing one lit gauge, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), “full tank” is substituted for the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and notifies that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effects effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. Although the description is omitted, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIGS. 21 (e) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demonstration effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demonstration screen (top menu screen).

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment operation), operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) To receive the operation) for priority.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 21L (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example) Then, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the operation for setting the item acquired by the player has been received, but the timing shown in FIG. 21 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demonstration screen (top menu screen) When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when () is displayed), an operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) As a result of accepting, the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. ) (In this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 9>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 9 in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the display of the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 (the meter gauge is full). It is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. In some cases, the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l). However, the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. Prioritizes operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for selecting menus such as mobile terminal linked services). It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) The operation shown in FIG. 22 (n) is performed (the timing at which the button screen is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed). When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to the menu screen (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal link service) is accepted, and corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal linked service or the like has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 10 in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to volume adjustment over the period shown in FIG. At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, the volume related adjustment is related. An operation related to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) The operation shown in FIG. 23 (n) is performed (the timing at which the volume adjustment is displayed without displaying the button effect). When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to volume adjustment (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted and corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 11>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 11 in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 20 is displayed (the meter gauge is full). It is an example. The meter increase effect, item provision effect, and button effect effects are the same as in Example 8 except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed. In addition, although the description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIG. By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the operation related to the two-dimensional code is performed. Prioritize operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is composed.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 24L (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the user has received the operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 24 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), a corresponding process is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 24L (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), In this example, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 12 in time series.

  In Example 12, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using an effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described embodiment 8 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIG. 25 (e) to FIG. 25 (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the production customization screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customize screen, the operation related to the effect customize screen is displayed. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 25L (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding process is performed on the assumption that the person has received the operation for setting the item acquired by the person, but the timing shown in FIG. 25 (n) (the button customization is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), an operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen) is received, and corresponding processing is performed. It should be noted that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 25L (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), an operation related to the effect customization screen (this example) Then, on the effect customization screen, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for determining an item to be set is accepted.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 25 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and as shown in FIG. 25 (m). In addition, even when the “Yes” option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item immediately is not performed, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 25 (q) to FIG. 25 (u). When the mobile terminal link service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 25 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 13>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 13 in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example in which an item is immediately set by an operation in a button effect.

  Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the above-described Example 12, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 26 and the description thereof is omitted. In this example, FIG. j) to button (k) shown in FIG. 26, when the “Yes” option is temporarily selected and a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), the “Yes” option is highlighted to notify that the selection of “Yes” is confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 26 (i), the item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the effect customization screen being displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. After that, the point of setting the item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 25. However, in this example, the effect customization screen is displayed in front of the display related to the item grant effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily In some cases, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, you may comprise so that at least one part of an effect customization screen may not overlap with at least one part of the display regarding an item provision effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 15>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 in time series.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example in which the item giving effect is continued even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described Example 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In this example, during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 28 (k), as shown in FIG. 28 (l), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). In FIG. 28 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 16>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 16 in time series.

  Example 16 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), as described with reference to FIG. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, an item is displayed across two fluctuations of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

  Specifically, after the change ends during execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 29 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Based on this, a new floating game has started. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item granting condition is satisfied, and the button effect is obtained based on the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. , The item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across multiple symbol variations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted with the stop or start of symbol variation, and the player's willingness to play Can be sustained. In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient and it may not be a continuous symbol fluctuation | variation.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 17>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 in time series.

  Example 17 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full). 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increasing effect is executed. ing.

  Specifically, during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 29 (j), as shown in FIG. 29 (k), the entry of a sphere into the meter increasing entrance 227 is detected, so that FIG. As shown in (2), during the display of the item by the item granting effect, the meter increasing effect for advancing the meter gauge is started. If the meter can be increased during the display of items as in this example, the player's willingness to play may be further enhanced. In addition to allowing the meter to increase while the item is displayed, the item granting condition may be met (the meter gauge may be full) In this case, you may comprise so that the right of item provision can be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 18>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 in time series.

  In Example 18, a mini game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini game ends. To do. FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which a mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amida lottery is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the Amida lottery in this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or the player's selection operation Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of “X” in the result of Amidaku is out of place, the image imitating the capsule means that the item has been acquired, and the letter E means that the item E has been acquired. Is configured to notify the item to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating the capsule is different from the usual, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be multiple types of mini games. Depending on the type of mini game, Ease of acquisition and appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) was an image simulating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and items acquired by the player are displayed. With the configuration as in this example, there are cases where the player can be entertained without getting bored of the period from when the item granting condition is satisfied until the item is displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / variation 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the trigger for the meter increasing production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of the ball” may be used as triggers for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (b), when the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during non-design fluctuation, the meter increases. An effect may be executed, and, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e), a ball enters the start opening (in this example, the first special figure start opening 230) during symbol variation. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 32 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the prefetch result of the variable game. In this case, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 32 (i) to (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (m) to FIG. 32 (o), even when the operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 32 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 32 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (in this example, the display of the princess character image) is executed as shown in FIG. .

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 in time series.

  The point of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 (the meter gauge is full) is that FIG. In this example, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, even if the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect). The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is received with priority over the operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 33 (d) while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 33 (c) is being displayed, As shown in FIG. 33 (f), after executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one lit gauge as shown in FIG. Instead, by executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank”, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition is satisfied. Is notified.

  The state shown in FIG. 33 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 33 (g) to FIG. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 33 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. As shown in FIG. 33 (k), the item name (item A in this example) IN and the item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (Contents omitted)) is displayed.

  In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at the back side of the display of the volume control screen, so that at least part of the display of the volume control screen is at least part of the display related to the item granting effect. It overlaps with a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information related to the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering.

  Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation is received, the display for switching between “Yes” and “No” during the button production is executed without performing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example) Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is received, a display for switching between “Yes” and “No” temporarily selected during the button production is executed without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

  Also, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 33 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, after the button production is ended, FIG. s) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a reduced scale over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD1 “item not set”, the character display CD3 “item A is being set” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entrance of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the condition for establishing the item provision, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of a ball” may be used as the conditions for establishing item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired in the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example, When the number exceeds 10,000 balls, an item may be given, or when a specific operation is received by the operation means as shown in FIGS. Items may be assigned to the keys 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is means capable of displaying an effect setting display (for example, an effect customization screen shown in FIG. 25, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, and a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19). This is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, item setting shown in FIG. 25, volume setting shown in FIG. 22, luminance setting shown in FIG. 19). In addition to the effect setting display in the middle, a display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, setting of item A shown in FIGS. 23 and 25). Show, give item It can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) suggests, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, the first display including one setting can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. In some cases, the player can be entertained even during display.

  In addition, there is provided count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 11 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases, and the count display means displays a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as a count display). , “First count display”, for example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 11C, and a character display CD2 of “full” shown in FIG. In this case, the first display may be displayed on the display unit, and the display by the count display unit may be a display that can be changed during a non-design variation display period.

  With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so there are cases where the player can be made to play without getting bored. In addition, there is a case where the player is not aroused even if the floating game is no longer held.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means. (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 14 (m), etc.).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 31) is executed. May be.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to be entertained for a period until the first display is displayed.

  Further, an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 11 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during the display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 11 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is an effective period display of the operation means (for example, FIG. 11 (j) and the like). The display including the operation valid period display TG) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, when the player can participate by operating the operation means even during the display of the first display, can increase the degree of intervention of the player, and can improve the interest of the player There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 25) may be increased.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of options by the player can be increased and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (o) to (r), when a ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for meter increase) When the ball enters the entrance, or when the ball enters the start opening or the winning opening), the first display (for example, the player selects item A separately from the effect setting display being displayed). Display indicating that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting corresponding to the first display (for example, item A) is added to one or a plurality of settings in the effect setting display It may be displayable on the display means.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. Even in this case, it is not necessary to delete the item. Further, even when the change of the symbol starts while displaying the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Moreover, even if the meter is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) during the display of the custom display, an item may appear when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear after the meter becomes full during non-design variation.

  In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after a meter that has been partially stored during non-design variation becomes full during the design variation. In addition, the item indicating the reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be easier to appear when the symbol changes than when the symbol is not changing, or may not appear when the symbol is changed. Further, a button effective meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-design variation. In addition, you can cancel the display of the demo screen (or without canceling), display the item, cancel the menu display (or without canceling), display the item, The item may be displayed by canceling the display of the two-dimensional code (or without canceling).

  Moreover, a meter may accumulate | store by opportunity other than ball passing. Further, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase of the meter is increased from the normal time. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the reserve is full or the electric support is completed. Also, the item may appear after the mini game when the meter is full. Moreover, you may perform the effect that an item appears even during SP reach. Further, the reach button production period and the customizable button production period may overlap, and the button may be effective for the other production rather than one. Further, the appearing item may change depending on the gaming state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed (additional items are displayed), or the customization screen is displayed again without changing In addition, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed. Further, a notice of an appearing item may be given, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. In addition, the items may be displayed over a plurality of variations, the meter may be stored during the display of the items, or the meter may be filled up with one kind of trigger.

  Other display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or a plurality of single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, Meter display may be performed only with a reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, or projector), or meter display may be performed with the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, When the ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative design display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device are increased by the same increase amount). It is good also as a count display means to perform meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 35 to FIG. 59 are diagrams showing staged effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 35 to 59, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 will be described. Although shown, the illustration display device 210 and the illustration holding lamp 216 are not shown. 35 to 59, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed in the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the stop symbol forms shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and (b). Has been. 35 to 59 show the pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208, but with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. The special symbol 1 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 4th symbol t2 are symbols for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped). As for the special symbol 1 and the symbol t1, the symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special symbol 1 is displayed while the symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped. During the change, the symbol “−” is displayed blinking. The special symbol 2 4th symbol t2 displays the symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special symbol 2 while the symbol of the special symbol 2 is stopped. During the change, the symbol “−” is displayed blinking. In this way, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position from the decorative symbol, but also has a different display mode (in this case, the shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice and the notice regarding the symbol variation display may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. Note that the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state.

  The number of holdings in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side, and the left hold icon is the older hold icon.

  In FIG. 35 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are all displayed in the default display mode (round shape). In a white and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, no hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold-up icon that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. . That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is also a round, non-patterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon in FIG. Alternatively, the display mode (in this case, the shape) may be different. By doing so, the player may be able to make a determination at first glance.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → start moving animation of the hold icon → start variation of the decorative symbol. This order may be reversed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. Are displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (3), the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, and the hold notice is started. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (4), a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (4), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display state of the button reception time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. This button reception time meter MT is a display showing the maximum time during which the operation of the effect button 136 can be received after the operation valid period starts. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but is arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and is superimposed (overlapped) by the decorative symbol. ) May be displayed in this manner. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Then, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (5), a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 35 (6). The At this time, the button reception time meter MT is deleted together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice in which switching display is performed in a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high as the step proceeds. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a prefetch notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 in step 1 is a display represented by the face of the longest character. In this production example, after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display of step 2 is performed more than the display of step 2 after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Are configured so as to be likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Note that the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed overlapping the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but may be displayed so as to be arranged behind the decorative symbol and superimposed by the decorative symbol. Further, the step-up notice may not be started even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, the step-up notice is finished, and the display SU1 in step 1 is deleted. In other words, in the current step-up notice, the display SU1 in step 1 ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (8), the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 35 (10). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (11), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the variable icon display area 280 without changing the display mode, and becomes a change icon h0 which is a notice display mode related to the symbol change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 35 (4). In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (12), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Then, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (14), the operation shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Here, the rate at which the gauge decreases may be faster, the same as, or slower than the rate at which the gauge is displayed before the performance button 136 is operated. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH having a face-length face (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (15)) are arranged side by side on the remaining display portion of the gauge. Yes. The number of mini-characters BCH having the longest length displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time from the start of the operation valid period). In this effect example, the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the production button 136 is operated, the display of the step-up notice starts and the display of the miniature character BCH having the longest length on the button reception time meter MT (the notice display using the button reception time meter MT) starts. The step-up notice display may be started after the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is started, or the step-up notice display start and button The start of the notice display using the reception time meter MT may be at the same timing. The same applies to the following description. The notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation effective period until the time corresponding to the maximum operation effective period elapses, but ends at an earlier timing. Alternatively, it may be terminated at a later timing. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the miniature character BCH having the longest length may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, in this effect example, the case where the miniature character BCH with the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT is likely to be a big hit than the case where the miniature character BCH with the longest length is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is configured. Further, a mini character (for example, a princess mini character) other than the mini-character BCH may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, after the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, a step-up notice that the displayed mini-character is changed may be performed. For example, the display mode of the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is changed. It may be easier to win a big hit. In this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is the same regardless of the number of miniature characters BCH displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot depends on the number of minicharacters BCH displayed. For example, the greater the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a deca button or a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates). When the button image 136a is displayed, when the effect button 136 is operated, the princess mini character may easily appear in the button reception time meter MT, and the princess mini character appears in the appearing mini character. When it is included, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when only the mini-character BCH having the longest length appears. On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, only the mini-character BCH having the longest length may appear easily. Also, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the mini-character BCH of the head length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. The notice display may be performed by changing the color of the gauge of the reception time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red), or the notice display may be performed by changing the shape of the button reception time meter MT. You may do it. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button reception time meter MT may differ depending on the timing when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation effective period starts. For example, the operation effective period starts. When the effect button 136 is operated at an early timing, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is easily displayed, and when the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the operation valid period starts, the timer display is performed. A notice may be given. Further, a notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed on display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a display device provided on the sub display device, the front door frame 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, or the like). You may do it.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (16), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. The display SU2 in step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the watch character. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the display SU2 in step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to win than when the display SU1 in step 1 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and there are three at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The display SU3 in step 3 is a display showing that the watch length character is breaking clothes. Further, along with the display SU3 in step 3, the word “Super Hot” is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to hit a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest number is reduced according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. The button reception time meter MT may be erased before the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3 (that is, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is ended). The button reception time meter MT may be deleted at a timing when the display SU2 in Step 2 changes to the display SU3 in Step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is performed even when the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT runs out, but a notice may be given when the gauge remaining amount runs out. Further, in this effect example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is not related to the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, but for example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT. If the princess mini-character is included, it may be easy to display up to the display SU3 in step 3, or conversely, the mini-character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is only the mini-character BCH with the longest length. The display SU3 in step 3 is difficult to be displayed, and the step-up notice may be easily ended by the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button or a display mode that vibrates and rotates). When the display mode is the display mode of the big button, the display SU3 of step 3 is more easily displayed than when it is the default display mode, and the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. The step-up notice may be more easily ended in the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the step-up notice is finished and the button reception time meter MT is also deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT runs out, or may end before the remaining amount of the gauge runs out.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (19) following FIG. 35 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Super Hot” and is notified that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. Normally, when the reach state is formed, “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached. In other words, when the reach state is formed and the “extremely hot” display is performed, it can be said that the big hit is more likely than when the “reach” display is performed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (21), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (22), as shown in FIG. 36 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a “game” on the balloon together with the up image of the Tono-sama character. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “ja” are arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of face length faces (for example, 9) are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is This suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the displayed case. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is performed, FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the big win is obtained in "Special figure A" is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of “Special figure A”.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (1), the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 37 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Then, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (5), the operation shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, and a timer notice display TM is displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. The timer display in the timer notice display TM displays a time corresponding to the time after the operation valid period is started (that is, the remaining time of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated). At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (6), “03.87” indicating 3.87 seconds is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, in the timer display, the timing at which the notice effect that is performed when the countdown in the timer notice display TM is completed is shown, and the time indicated by the timer display when the timer display is started is It differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period is started. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice is performed by the timer notice display TM displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. In this example, the timer notice display TM is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but the timer notice display TM may not be displayed. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM is displayed in such a manner that the time in the timer display is further reduced in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period, and 2.49 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. “02.49” is displayed indicating that

  After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (8), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes to a red display color and is displayed in bold to notify that a notice has occurred due to completion of the countdown. The change from the display SU2 in step 2 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted up. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice for the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are related to each other. From another viewpoint, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are separate notices. In this example, the contents of the effect of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display TM, for example, the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. When the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 in step 3 is performed from the display SU1 in step 1 through the display SU2 in step 2, but the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. In the case where the number is small (for example, 1 second), the display SU1 in step 2 is not in time after the display SU1 in step 1 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 in step 3 may be displayed without displaying the display SU1 in step 1 and the display SU2 in step 2. Further, in this production example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is set to the time (for example, 1.13 seconds) after the operation effective period is started from the time corresponding to the operation effective period (for example, 5 seconds). When the deducted remaining time is 3.87 seconds, “03.87” indicating this is displayed. However, according to the gauge remaining amount of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated. The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the displayed initial value of the timer to “00.00”. . Specifically, for example, “04.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer within a period of 1 second (first period) after the operation valid period is started, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second. In the period (second period), “03.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer.... In the period within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds (the fourth period), “01 .00 "may be displayed. In addition, when a certain period is exceeded after the operation valid period is started, the timer notice may not be started.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (10) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (10) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 35 (18) to 36 (25), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown. The effects shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 37 (1) to (5), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (4), as shown in FIG. 38 (6). At the same time, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Furthermore, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH having a face-length face (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (6)) are arranged side by side on the remaining display portion of the gauge. Yes. In other words, the notice display is performed by displaying the mini-character BCH of the bancho. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the timer notice display TM shows a predetermined value regardless of the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. (For example, in the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 38 (6), “30.00” is displayed). At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM may be varied according to the time when the operation valid period is started, so that the timing at which the countdown ends is the same. The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by varying the time during which the reach effect is started and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach or the time for temporarily stopping display due to fluctuations in the fluctuation. Further, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be displayed according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that it is one notice display in which the notice by the display of the miniature character BCH of the head length in the button reception time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated. In other words, in this effect example, at least the remaining time when the effect button 136 is operated in at least the time set as the operation effective period is notified by the button reception time meter MT, and some notice (a minimaster of the bancho) It can be said that the character BCH display and timer notice are being performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH having the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and there are three at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM advances the countdown according to the time after the timer notice starts, and at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (7), “28.50” indicating 28.50 seconds. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, along with the display SU3 in step 3, the word “Super Hot” is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is one at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM advances the countdown according to the time after the timer notice starts, and at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8), “26.00” indicating 26.00 seconds. Is displayed. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 37, the result of the countdown by the timer notice does not affect the step-up notice, and the countdown continues in FIG. 38 (8). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (9), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. At this time, the step-up notice ends and the button reception time meter MT is also erased, but the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed and the timer notice is continuously performed even after the step-up notice is completed. In addition, the period for which the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from the start of the operation valid period until the gauge remaining in the button reception time meter MT starts decreasing until the gauge remaining amount becomes zero. It can also be said that it is a long period. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (13) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (13) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 36 (19) to 36 (22), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (12), after the button notice effect is started, if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (13), the decorative symbol display is displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (14). In the device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the Tono-sama character. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the head is not displayed around the characters “game” in the balloon, and is larger than the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. This indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the cut-in image is not displayed. At this time, the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (14), “10.50” is displayed indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM is the remaining 10.50 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (15), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama lost the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. The “decoration 6” scheduled to stop display is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. On the other hand, at this time, the timer notice continues, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (15), “05.50” is displayed indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM is the remaining 5.50 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 38 (16) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Thus, the timer notice continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (17), and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice is shown in FIG. 38 (18). As shown in the figure, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the long-length character BC appears backwards, and the timer notice display TM displays the character “Restoration”, thereby notifying that the resurgence effect is performed. That is, it is reported that the big hit is confirmed. Note that in the revival effect, an effect that fails to revive is performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (19) following FIG. 38 (18), the back-length character BC facing the front and the decorative symbol “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Are displayed, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. The timer notice display TM also displays the word “congratulations” and congratulates you on the big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 40 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). In this production example, a long-length icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. And the button reception time meter MT in this production example differs from the aspect mentioned above, and as shown to FIG. 40 (3)-the same figure (7), according to the time after the operation effective period was started. Thus, the display mode changes so as to gradually become shorter. As the button reception time meter MT becomes shorter, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves so as to follow the right end portion of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the position of the longest icon arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT is fixed and has not moved. In the following description, an icon that is arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT is referred to as a fixing icon, and is arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT. The icon that is displaced in accordance with the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be referred to as a movement icon. Therefore, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the bancho icon as time passes. In this production example, it is predicted that something will happen when the panda bites into the watchmaster, that is, the display of the button reception time meter MT itself functions as a notice display. From another point of view, when the button reception time meter MT is displayed, the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is started before the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect. It can also be said. In this production example, a step-up notice may be performed in which icons displayed on both ends of the button reception time meter MT change according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. For example, the operation effective period When the button starts, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. When the time elapses, the panda icon changes to the longest icon one by one, and the greater the icon changes, the greater the trust of the jackpot A high-priority notice may be easily displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed as the icon changes. In this example, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the icon of the character is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. For example, the notice display is performed by changing the color of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a notice display by changing the display mode of button reception time meter MT.

  FIG. 40 (4) shows a state where the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation effective period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 40 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change. At this time, a mini-character (for example, a mini-character BCH, a princess mini-character, or the like) may be displayed on the button reception time meter MT and a notice display may be performed. In this case, for example, when the two icons added to the button reception time meter MT are both icon numbers, the princess mini-character is easily displayed, and the 2 icons added to the button reception time meter MT When the two icons are a combination of a bancho icon and a panda icon, the bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. By displaying the characters “Gabu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, may have a sense of expectation for the big hit. In this production example, the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is performed within the range of the period from the start of the operation effective period until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (8), the display SU2 in step 2 is covered with a number of star symbols in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is an effect that is performed when the panda bites the Bancho, that is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT affects the step-up notice (the notice that is started by operating the effect button 136). It can be said that it is something to give. Thereby, it may be possible to have an expectation that the step-up notice will change. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed by pretending that the step-up notice is over, the step-up notice may be surprising. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of the display of the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is determined. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, when the effect button is not operated during the operation effective period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 in step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of “Premier yo” and the jackpot is confirmed. A state of being informed is shown. In other words, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. It should be noted that if the production button 136 is not operated in the button operation effect described above, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore the premier notice is not performed. It may be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (10), it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped with a combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” jackpot decoration symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation fluctuation is performed with the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, and then FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this production example, the state of the production performed when the production button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period in the button operation production is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS.

  FIG. 41 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation effective period starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (4) to (6), when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 41 (7). The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the step-up notice is started after the operation effective period has elapsed even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period is shown. In this case, since the button reception time meter MT is deleted as the operation effective period elapses, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Further, in the case where the above-described auto button mode is set, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the operation effective period is started. At the same time as the step-up notice is started, a notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed, or only the step-up notice is performed, and the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only the notice using the button reception time meter MT is performed, and the step-up notice may not be performed. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (7), the step-up notice is developed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 41 (8) to (9). In this case, the step-up notice may end at the display SU2 at Step 2 without displaying the display SU3 at Step 3, or the display SU1 at Step 1 without displaying the display SU2 at Step 2. The step-up notice may end. The effects shown in FIGS. 41 (8) to (9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 35 (16) to (17) except that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed. Is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (11), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Super Hot” and is notified that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  After that, after the reach effect as described above is performed, if it is a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed, as shown in FIG. It is confirmed and displayed with a combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. The effect shown in FIG. 42 (1) is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this effect example, a character display “Pseudo-ream when three people are gathered” is displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is predicted that a pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

  Then, a button operation effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 40 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself shortens with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this effect example), and the desired display results are displayed (Echigoya character ECG, Tonosama character YSM, and princess character HME. Display), it is predicted that a pseudo-ream will be performed. When the pseudo-ream is not performed, the three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation. You may make it increase a character one by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation. Further, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) before the operation effective period elapses, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream is performed. May be.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (4), as shown in FIG. 42 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (5), as shown in FIG. 42 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (6), as shown in FIG. 42 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (8), the longest icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT and the panda icon are separated from each other. Is displayed and it is predicted that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (9), the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is displayed, and a state in which a temporary stop by the fluctuation display is performed is shown. It is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. That is, in this effect example, the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, thereby informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this example, “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the same time, but may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (10) shows a state where the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “Pseudo-ream when three people are gathered” is displayed, and a second pseudo-ream effect will be announced.

  Then, a button operation effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (11), a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 40 (3). However, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this production example, it is easier to generate a pseudo-ream when two watch icons are displayed than when a watch icon and a panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. When two icons are displayed, a pseudo-ream may always be performed. In addition, when two long icons are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a big button, a display mode of vibration and rotation, etc.). On the contrary, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easy for two button icons to be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. .

Thereafter, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (12), as shown in FIG. 42 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (13), as shown in FIG. 42 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character YSM at the top of the display screen. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14), as shown in FIG. 42 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  Then, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 42 (8), the pair of numbered icons displayed along with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the button reception time meter MT indicates “all members”. Characters are displayed, and it is predicted that a second pseudo-ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (16), a combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is displayed and a temporary stop by the fluctuation variation display is shown. It is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (17) shows a state where the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “It is a hot battle when three people are gathered” is displayed, and it is foretold that a high-reliability advance notice will be made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (18) following FIG. 42 (17), the button design effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (18), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to a certain notice effect being performed. In the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 43 (18), a long icon is displayed at each end. In this production example, a higher-priority notice is more likely to occur when two icon icons are displayed than when a button icon and a panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , By displaying two icons of the head of the number, it is easy to make a big hit (a big win symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed).

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (19), as shown in FIG. 43 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (20), as shown in FIG. 43 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM at the top of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (21), as shown in FIG. 43 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (23), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character TSM, and the princess character HME are arranged so as to overlap the front side of the middle symbol, and in the button reception time meter MT displayed below, The word “Gekiatsu” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach. The production shown in FIGS. 43 (24) to (30) is the same as FIGS. 36 (20) to (26) except that the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are different. To do.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state in which three characters are not arranged in the button operation effect and no pseudo-ream is performed is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to (6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (6), the button operation effect is performed. As a result of the effect button 136 being pressed twice, the Echigoya character ECG and the Tono-sama character YSM are displayed. It is shown. When the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (6), the princess character HME is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 44 (7). A “x” is displayed to indicate that the princess character HME has not appeared.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (8), the number-length icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT and the panda icon are separated from each other, and the letter “sorry” is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Displayed, it is notified that the button operation effect has failed and no pseudo-ream is performed. Note that there may be a case where a pseudo-ream is performed even though three characters are not displayed and a character of “sorry” is displayed. In this case, for example, a big hit may be determined as a premium effect of breaking the law.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 44 (9) to (12), the decorative symbols stop in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, and the decorative pattern of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” Confirmed in combination. The effects shown in FIGS. 44 (9) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 35 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this effect example, the icons displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are the bancho icon and the panda icon, and the two bancho icons in the effect examples shown in FIGS. The big hit symbol is harder to be displayed than when it is displayed.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (4), as shown in FIG. 45 (6). At the same time, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 45 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is a timing later than the timing shown in FIG. 35 (14), and a timing slightly before the operation effective period ends. It has become. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 45 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is small, and the number of mini-characters BCH of the number length displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (7), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays “decoration 5” on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The step-up notice ends at a timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the timing at which the step-up notice ends is determined in advance (for example, in this production example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed). It will vary depending on the timing at which 136 is operated. For this reason, the later the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 is operated at a timing just before the operation effective period ends, after the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 in step 1 is started, the display SU3 in step 3 is started. Even though there is not enough time to perform the development effect, and the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, the step-up notice is ended in the display SU1 in step 1. Note that the display of the step-up notice to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as shown in this production example, the execution time of the step-up notice is short. In this case, the display may be started from the display SU3 in step 3 without displaying the display SU1 in step 1 and the display SU2 in step 2.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (8) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 45 (7) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 35 (10) to (13), description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (4), as shown in FIG. 46 (6). At the same time, a step-up notice is started. In this production example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 in step 2, and then, as shown in FIG. 3 display SU3 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 46 (5), the timing at which the production button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 35 (14). Since it is shorter than the execution time of the effect scheduled to be executed in the up notice, when the display is started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display SU2 in step 2 and the display SU3 in step 3 cannot be displayed sufficiently. . Therefore, in this effect example, the display of the step for starting the display in the step-up notice is determined from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 in step 2, and the display is performed up to the display SU3 in step 3. . Thereby, for example, when the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, there is a case where it becomes impossible to see the display button 136 due to a delay in the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, the above-described character icons may be added to both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, when a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed, the production button 136 is operated. In this case, the mini-character BCH of the bancho is likely to appear on the button reception time meter MT, and when the icon of the bancho is displayed, the princess mini-character is more likely to appear than the mini-character BCH of the bancho. When a princess mini character appears, it may be more likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed) than when a bancho mini character BCH appears.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (8) to (16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (8) to (16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 35 (18) to 36 (26), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The production shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), the button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (4), “remaining 5.00 seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is gradually reduced by the countdown method according to the time after the operation effective period is started. In this countdown display, the countdown may be advanced in accordance with the passage of actual time, the countdown may be advanced faster than the passage of actual time, or the countdown may be advanced later than the passage of actual time. You may make it. In this production example, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation effective period starts. However, the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation effective period starts. When the maximum duration is 5 seconds, display the remaining time, for example, “3.00 seconds left” is displayed when the remaining operation is 3 seconds after the operation valid period starts. Also good.

  Thereafter, the timing shown in FIG. 47 (5) (for example, in this production example, the timing at which 2 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period started and the remaining time is displayed as “3.00 seconds”). When the effect button 136 is operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 47 (6), and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the countdown display is deleted together with the button image 136a.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (7), the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 40 (3) is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The button reception time meter MT starts to be displayed with the same length regardless of the timing from when the operation effective period is started until the effect button 136 is operated. On the other hand, the execution period of the step-up notice depends on the timing from when the operation effective period is started until the effect button 136 is operated, so the period during which the button reception time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button reception time meter MT is shortened varies depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the button reception time meter is increased as the operation button 136 is operated earlier after the operation valid period starts. The rate at which MT becomes shorter is slower.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is shortened according to the time after the button reception time meter MT starts displaying, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (8), the panda icon is close to the number-long icon. , By displaying the letters “gabutsu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 47 (9) to (13) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 47 to (13) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 40 (8) to (12), and thus the description thereof is omitted. Thus, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation valid period (display of the remaining time and display of the button reception time meter MT) is changed before and after the operation of the effect button 136. Yes.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 48A is the same as that in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (3), the button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (4), “5 seconds remaining” indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is reduced by a countdown method according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In this effect example, compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 47, since there is no display for less than 1 second, it can be said that the remaining time is roughly displayed. In this countdown display, the countdown may be advanced in accordance with the passage of actual time, the countdown may be advanced faster than the passage of actual time, or the countdown may be advanced later than the passage of actual time. You may make it.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (5) (for example, in this production example, 1 second has elapsed since the operation effective period started, and the remaining time is displayed as “4 seconds remaining”). When the effect button 136 is operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 48 (6), and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the countdown display is continuously displayed, and the countdown is continuously performed. At this time, the countdown display is erased from the “after” portion, indicating that the display has been switched from the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period to the display of the timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 48 (7) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a countdown as a timer advance notice. At this time, the display of the numerical part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. When the display of the numerical value portion of the countdown display changes to multiple colors, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the numerical value portion of the countdown display may be displayed in another color, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be varied depending on the display color. Further, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the countdown display may be changed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by the displayed typeface. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed and the display SU1 of step 1 remains as it is.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (10), when the countdown display becomes “0 second” and the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays step 1 as shown in FIG. 48 (11). The display changes from SU1 to display SU3 in step 3. Also, the countdown display is erased. The change from the display SU1 in step 1 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as a timer notice is completed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice for the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are related to each other. From another viewpoint, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the count-down of the timer notice are separate notices.

  After that, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 35 (18) to (19), the reach state is reached, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (12) to (18). Is done. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 36 (20) to (26), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 49 (1) are the same as those in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Also, in this production example, the character display “Chance is a chance when three people gather” is displayed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high when three characters appear. Has been.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 40 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself shortens with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (in this effect example, three times), and desired display results are displayed (Echigoya character ECG, Tonosama character YSM, and princess character HME. Display), it is notified that the advance notice with high reliability of the jackpot is performed. That is, when all three characters are displayed, the notice is displayed more easily than when all three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation. You may make it increase a character one by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (4), as shown in FIG. 49 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the operation valid period continues. That is, a state is shown in which a hidden button effect that accepts the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in a state where the display that prompts the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. When the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (5), as shown in FIG. 49 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM at the top of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed alongside the Echigoya character ECG. That is, a state where the Tono-sama character YSM appears by the hidden button operation is shown. Furthermore, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (6), as shown in FIG. 49 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Are displayed side by side on the character's character YSM, and a desired display result is displayed. That is, a state in which the princess character HME appears by the hidden button operation is shown. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the hidden button effect is performed during the execution of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (8), the number-length icon and the panda icon that are displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the characters “all members” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is informed that a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high will be performed thereafter.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (9), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the princess character HME are arranged so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below the character symbol is displayed. On the time meter MT, the word “chance” is displayed, and a notice display is provided to suggest that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In the button operation effect, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient and three characters are not displayed or the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of the three characters If the above characters do not appear, instead of “chance” characters, for example, “sorry” may be displayed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Further, when reaching a specific symbol (for example, “decoration 7”), the big hit symbol may be displayed more easily than when reaching another symbol.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into the above-described subjugation reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (11), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (12), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 49 (13).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (14), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen where the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, then FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 37 (1) to (3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (3), after the button operation effect is started, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (4), the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed, and it is notified that the step is advanced in the step-up notice by the repeated operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, when the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (5), as shown in FIG. 50 (6), a step-up notice is given in response to the first operation of the effect button 136. The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, at this timing, the button reception time meter MT is arranged with a plurality of mini-characters BCH (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (6)) side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. . Even in this production example, the mini-character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (6), the player continues to perform the striking operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the production button 136, but the step-up is performed when a predetermined number of continuous operations of the production button 136 are performed after the operation valid period is started. A notice may be started. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is being performed while the effect of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is being executed is shown.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is continuously operated and the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the steps from the display SU1 of step 1 to the step SU1. Step up to display SU2 of 2. As described above, in this effect example, the display may be stepped up in the step-up notice on condition that the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly. In other words, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient. If so, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge.

  Subsequently, when the effect button 136 is continuously operated and the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the steps from the display SU <b> 2 in step 2. Step up to 3 display SU3. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that it is easier to hit a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the number of mini-characters BCH with the longest length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge.

  Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 50 (9) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 50 (9) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 35 (18) to 36 (26), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 51 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (3), a state in which a button repeated operation effect is started is shown. More specifically, a long-length character BC1 is displayed at the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character “Wake up the long-length by continuous hitting” is displayed. That is, in this button-hit operation effect, it can be said that it is a mission effect for the purpose of displaying the mode in which the dresser's clothes are broken within a predetermined time by repeatedly pressing the effect button 136.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (4), a state in which the operation effective period in the button repeated operation effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “Wake up the pitcher by repeated hits” displayed on the right side of the long-length character BC1 is changed to the character display of “start consecutive hits” and “ A continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT is displayed below the character display of “start”. The button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hits has a display form different from the button receiving time meter MT described above, and is configured by an indicator composed of a plurality of blocks (9 in the effect example shown in FIG. 51 (4)). Yes. The display mode of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT changes in such a manner that it is deleted one by one from the rightmost block according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 51 (5) to (7), when the production button 136 is operated repeatedly, the number of star symbols displayed on the character BC1 as the number-long character increases as the number of operations increases. It will increase.

Thereafter, when a predetermined number of operations of the production buttons 136 are performed, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display of a mode in which the character of the watchmaster is breaking clothes (final form). Is displayed), and the text “Awakening” is displayed to notify that the purpose (mission) of the button striking operation effect has been achieved.
At this time, the button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hitting is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner in which the displayed blocks change to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this effect example, it can be said that the notice display is being performed due to the change in the display mode of the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT does not change and may indicate that the reliability of the big hit is low, or the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is erased when the mission is achieved. The notice display may not be performed. Further, the display color of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT may be changed to any one of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot may be varied depending on the changed display color. Thus, in this effect example, after the purpose of the button hitting operation effect is achieved, it is shown that the notice display using the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits is performed. It should be noted that, in the button repeated operation effect, the number of operations of the effect button 136 during the operation effective period is determined even when it is determined in advance that the mission is not achieved or the mission is determined to be achieved. If the number of times necessary for the mission to be achieved is not reached, the longest character is not displayed in the final form (that is, the final form of the longest character BC2 is not displayed), and the button for continuous hitting Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, the notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is not performed. If it is determined in advance that the mission is to be achieved, even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times necessary for the mission to be achieved in the operation effective period, The final form may be displayed. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT are erased, the notice display using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT is not performed. In addition, after the operation effective period has started, the number of operations of the effect button 136 has reached the number necessary to achieve the mission. For example, since the predetermined period has not elapsed since the operation effective period started. If the mission achievement condition is not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the effect button 136 is continuously operated until the predetermined period elapses. Further, in the button repeated operation effect, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the effect button 136 after the operation effective period starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (9), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining number of blocks is four. Has been. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (10), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining number of blocks is one. Has been. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (11), the decorative symbol is set to the normal display state, and the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” that forms the reach state on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively is stopped and displayed. The state in which the middle symbols are displayed in a manner that they are variably displayed is shown. Then, the final-length character BC2 moves to the position where it overlaps on the front side of the middle symbol, the character “SP” is displayed, and it is notified that the shift to super reach is made.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 51 (12) to (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to super reach (decision reach), and shows a state in which the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 51 (12) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 43 (24) to (30), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button repeated operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 51 (1) to (4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (4), after the operation effective period in the button repeated operation effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 52 (5) to (6), the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly. As the number of operations increases, the number of star symbols displayed overlaid on the longest character BC1 increases.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined number of operations of the production button 136 are performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final-length character BC2 as shown in FIG. The text “Awakening” is displayed to inform you that the mission has been accomplished. At this time, the button receiving time meter RMT for continuous hitting is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner in which the displayed blocks change to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this production example, compared to the production example shown in FIG. 51, the production button 136 is struck repeatedly, and the number of operations per time is large. The mission has been completed with (7 left). Thereafter, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (8), a state is shown in which the Tono-like mini character YM is displayed in the blank portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT. Yes. This Tono-sama mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early (when the mission is accomplished within the predetermined first mission achievement time). It can be said that it is an example of a notice display using the button receiving time meter RMT for repeated hits together with a change in the display mode of the button receiving time meter RMT for consecutive hits. That is, it can be said that the mode of the notice using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT varies depending on the time from the start of the operation effective period to the completion of the mission. As described above, when the notice is displayed by using the blank portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous button accepting time meter RMT, the effect is improved and the interest may be improved. This Tono-sama mini character YM may be displayed whenever a mission is achieved, regardless of the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission, Even if the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early, it may not be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama mini character YM appears, the big hit may be confirmed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (9) shows a state in which two more blocks are deleted and the remaining number of blocks is three according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing. In addition, the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT also shows that the Tonosama mini character YM moves to the left side as the blank portion from which the block is erased is enlarged. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (9), a state in which the character “Big” appears along with the Tono-sama mini character YM is shown. In this effect example, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by the appearance of the characters “large board behavior”. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (10) shows that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining number of blocks is one. Has been. At this time, the display of the characters “Ohban behavior” displayed along with the Tono-sama mini-character YM is completely displayed. In this production example, only “large board” of “large board behavior” may appear, and “behavior” may not appear. In this case, the entire “large board behavior” character may appear. The big hit symbol may be made harder to display than when the symbol appears. By doing in this way, until the Tono-sama character YM is completely displayed, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not it is a high-priority reliability notice. In addition, a display of characters that appear different from “behavior” may be displayed. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 52 (11) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 51 (11) to (18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of the reserved consecutive resort notice effect executed during the big hit game. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  53, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the state of the effect movable body 224 is shown. Is also illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (1), the first special figure display device 212 stops display with “special figure I” which is a lost symbol, and the second special figure display device 214 shows “hit symbol”. The special figure “a” is stopped and displayed, and in this production example, the special figure 2 shows a big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are “special symbol I”. The symbol “x” indicating that it has become “stopped” is displayed, and the symbol t2 of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the symbol “A” indicating that it has been a big hit with “special figure a”. Yes.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 53, since a big hit is made in the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280. In FIG. 53 (1), four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of special figure 2 are displayed, and any of these four hold icons h21 to h24 of special figure 2 has a default display mode ( It is displayed in a round patternless and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0, and no hold icon in the special figure 1 is displayed. In this production example, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the electric support state, but the hold icon may be displayed when the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1 or more. Good.

  In the effect movable body 224, the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are both in the initial positions, that is, they are not movable.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (2), a state where a big hit game is started and a big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the big-decorative decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” displayed when the big hit is displayed is the upper left of the display screen. In the center of the display screen, it is displayed in the corner, and a co-panda character with a fan is celebrating the big hit.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (3) shows a state in which the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started. It should be noted that, in the performance during the big hit game, the number of hits in the big hit, the number of balls gained during the big hit this time, and the number of balls played during the big hit may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (4) shows a state in which the seventh round is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “super-hot when the arm comes out with the button” are displayed on the right side of the copanda character, and the effect movable body 224 is operated by operating the effect button 136. In such a case, there is an explanation that it is notified that there is a high possibility that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display that is being held (that is, there is a high possibility that a suspended consecutive resort will occur). Has been done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of a look-ahead notice effect during a big hit game. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (7), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224 is shown in FIG. 53 (8). 224b operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a plurality of star symbols in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that the reserved extended resort is generated. The “holding villa confirmation” is displayed. In this production example, when the production movable body 224 is operated, the reserved villa is always generated. However, even if the production movable body 224 is operated, the reservation villa may not be generated. Good.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the reserved consecutive house notice effect executed during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIGS. 54 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 53 (1) to (6), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 54 (8), the effect movable body 224 performs the operation. The operation is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a “chance” character that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved resort will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini-characters PND (5 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (8)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini characters PND displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time from the start of the operation valid period). In this effect example, the panda mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display that suggests that the expected degree of occurrence of the reserved villa is not so high. Note that even if the effect button 136 is operated, the panda mini character PND may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. In other words, when the panda mini character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the reserved resort is more likely to occur than when the panda mini character PND is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, a mini character different from the panda mini character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation that a reserved resort may be generated may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be displayed together. In this production example, the degree of expectation that a reserved villa is generated is the same regardless of the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, but depending on the number of panda mini characters PND displayed. The degree of expectation that the reserved resort may be generated may be different. For example, the greater the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, the higher the expectation that the reserved resort may be generated. Further, the type of the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT may change depending on the timing after the operation effective period starts. For example, the operation timing of the effect button 136 may be the operation effective period. If it is an early timing after the start of the character, a mini character other than the panda mini character (for example, a mini-character of a long length) may be easily displayed. In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a character display of “chance” is displayed, and thereafter, the panda mini character PND in the button reception time meter MT is not operated by operating the effect button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of “chance” and the display of the panda mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT may be simultaneously performed with the operation of the effect button 136 as an opportunity. In other words, in this effect example, the target displayed by operating the effect button 136 is “chance”, and the display of the panda mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT is displayed by operating the effect button 136. A non-example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Further, the number of displayed panda mini characters PND is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is two at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (9).

  FIG. 54 (10) shows a state in which the eighth round is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (10), a state is shown in which the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT becomes zero. That is, a state is shown in which the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the operation effective period was started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only one star figure, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (12). As described above, the display of the word “sorry” is made, and it is notified that the button operation effect has failed and the possibility that a reserved resort will be generated is low. In this production example, even if a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the button operation presentation may fail, and this configuration impairs expectations for the reserved villa. May be reduced.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the reserved consecutive resort notice effect executed during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIGS. 55 (1) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 54 (1) to (7), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 55 (8), the effect is also produced in this effect example. Although the operation by the movable body 224 is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character “Atsui” that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved resort will occur. When this “hot” character is displayed, the effect movable body 224 is more likely to operate than when the “chance” character is displayed, that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved resort will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Further, in this effect example, a plurality of mini-characters BCH and Panda mini-characters PND each consisting of a chief-face are displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 55 (8)). In the device 208, two mini-characters BCH having the longest length and three panda mini-characters PND are arranged side by side. In this production example, when the mini character BCH of the chess length is displayed rather than the case where only the panda mini character PND is displayed, the reserved game is more likely to occur ( The design is easy to be confirmed). In other words, when the reserved consecutive resort is scheduled to occur, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is easily displayed. Note that the mini-character BCH with the longest length is arranged on the right side of the mini character PND of the panda, and the mini-character BCH with the long length is erased earlier than the mini-character PND of the panda in accordance with the decrease of the remaining gauge. Therefore, the player may be able to pay attention to a change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT in order to confirm the miniature character BCH of the watchmaster. Further, since the number of mini characters displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation effective period is started), the operation effective period is started. When the operation timing of the production button 136 is late and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is less than the space for placing the miniature character BCH, the panda mini character PND alone is displayed. In some cases, the mini-character BCH of the bancho may not be displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve his willingness to press the effect button 136 quickly in order to confirm the mini-character BCH of the watchmaster. In this production example, the expectation level that the production movable body 224 operates is the same regardless of the number of Bancho mini characters BCH displayed, but depending on the number of Bancho mini characters BCH displayed. Thus, the expectation degree that the effect movable body 224 operates may be different. For example, the effect movable body 224 may be more easily operated as the number of mini-characters BCH having a longer number is displayed. In addition, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 55 (6) may be displayed in a display mode of a big button or a display mode that vibrates and rotates, and when such a display mode is displayed. May be displayed more easily than the case of being displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Further, all the mini-characters BCH with the longest length are erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the panda mini-character PND is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 55 (9), two panda mini characters PND are displayed.

  FIG. 55 (10) shows a state in which the eighth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (10), the remaining time of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0, and the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the operation effective period started. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (11), the forearm portion 224 b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the forearm portion 224b has an effect as if the decorative symbol display device 208 is affected. The display is done. As described above, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not immediately operate in response to the effect button 136 being pressed, and it operates for the first time when the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT becomes zero. An example of an effect to be performed is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (12), the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the reserved extended resort is confirmed to occur. The “holding villa confirmation” is displayed.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 56 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 56 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and all of the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are the default. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display positions of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. Are displayed as a hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display mode of the button reception time meter MT in this production example is the mode described above with reference to FIG. 40 (3), and a long-length icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT.

  FIG. 56 (4) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is shortened as time elapses after the operation effective period is started.

Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 in step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is deleted, but the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. By displaying the characters “Gabu”, it is shown that the panda is biting the Bancho. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, may have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (8), after the number-length icon displayed on the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a panda icon, the pair of panda icons are separated from each other. In the button reception time meter MT, a character “change icon” is displayed to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (9), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the symbol variation display is notified in advance. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged in the display SU2 in step 2. As described above, in this effect example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 in step 3, the change icon changes to the notice display form by the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT. In some cases, a sense of expectation for the jackpot can be maintained. In this effect, the ease of display of the display SU3 in step 3 may be different depending on the characters displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter are displayed. In the case of a bancho icon and a panda icon, it is difficult to display the display SU3 in step 3, and the step-up notice is easily ended by displaying the display SU1 in step 1 or the display SU2 in step 2, and the button reception time meter When the icons displayed at both ends are two icons with the longest length, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed, and when the “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the above-described subjugation reach has been developed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (12), a button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (13), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG. 56 (14).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (15), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama lost the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”, FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 56 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (5) and the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (6), FIG. 57 (7) shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the step-up notice is continuously performed, but the display SU1 in step 1 is not changed to the display SU2 in step 2, but remains as the display SU1 in step 1. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the panda icon is close to the longest icon. However, as shown in FIG. 57 (8), the panda returns to the Bancho and sees it. In this production example, when the production where the panda returns to Bancho is performed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol than when the production where the panda bites into the Bancho is performed (this In the production example, as will be described later, the suspended symbol variation display is likely to be a big hit).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (9), after the panda icon displayed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the number-length icon, the pair of number-length icons are separated from each other. In the button reception time meter MT, a character “change icon” is displayed to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 in step 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Tono-sama, and a hold notice is performed. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged in the display SU1 in step 1 here. As described above, in this production example, even when the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display is a result that the expectation for the big hit cannot be expected, the pre-read notice using the button reception time meter MT may be performed. In some cases, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit in the suspended symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect by the button reception time meter MT being performed in the same display mode, either the change icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 changes, so the notice effect of the symbol change display is given. It can be said that at least a part of the production is performed in the same manner in the production of the pre-reading notice, and thereby, the expectation can be maintained until the change icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 change. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then in FIG. 57 (14). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 7”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  58 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 58 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). Therefore, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 58 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (2), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and a button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (4), the button image 136a is deleted as shown in FIG. 58 (5). At the same time, the button reception time meter MT is enlarged and a mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (5), the characters “stock chance” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and in the enlarged button reception time meter MT, the operation effective period is displayed. The display mode changes so as to decrease the gauge according to the time from the start of. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button reception time meter MT has three treasure chests (treasure chests TR1, TR2, TR3) arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge, and the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes. It is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the user passes through the center of each treasure chest. That is, it is notified that a timing-pressed mini game is started. In this effect example, the mini-game by the button reception time meter MT may not be performed, and the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT described above may be performed. Further, the number of treasure chests to be displayed may be different depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time after the operation effective period when the effect button 136 is operated, for example, the effect button Since the remaining amount of the gauge increases as the operation timing of 136 starts earlier after the operation valid period starts, the number of treasure chests may be increased by that amount, and as the operation timing of the production button 136 is delayed, The number of treasure chests to be displayed may be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), the effect button 136 is displayed at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes substantially the center of the treasure chest TR1 arranged at the rightmost of the three treasure chests. When operated, as shown in FIG. 58 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened and a Sabohani notice icon I71 to which “change” is added may appear. . This Sabohani notice icon I71 is an aspect of a prefetch notice, and when the Sabohani notice icon I71 is stocked, it is informed that the change icon or the hold icon changes to the notice display form. Thus, in this production example, when the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure box arranged in the button reception time meter MT, the production button 136 is operated with good timing, A notice icon may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be called a notice item or a mini item. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure chest TR1, the notice icon may not appear. Other than the notice icon may appear, for example, a notice character appears and gives a notice of the symbol change display or a pre-read notice, or a simple presentation without notice (for example, an explanation display). May be performed. Further, there may be a case where the display mode of the change icon or the hold icon does not change even if the Sabohani notice icon I71 is stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (7), when the savory notice icon I71 appears from the treasure chest TR1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. I71 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially the center of the treasure chest TR2 arranged on the right side of the remaining two treasure chests (treasure chests TR2 and TR3). When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (10), the treasure chest TR2 moves upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened and a character icon “subjugation” is added to the notice icon I72. May appear. This Tono-sama notice icon I72 is an aspect of a look-ahead notice, and when the Ton-sama notice icon I72 is stocked, a strong cut-in CI1a is displayed in the subjugation reach that is scheduled to be executed with the symbol variation display being held. It is predicted that it will appear. That is, when the notice icon I71 of Tono-sama is stocked, a look-ahead notice that the subjugation reach will be performed in the reserved symbol variation display and a look-ahead notice that the strong cut-in CI1a will appear are performed. It can be said. It should be noted that the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear even if the lord's notice icon I72 is stocked, or the strong cut-in CI1a may appear.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (10), when the lord's notice icon I72 appears from the treasure chest TR, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (11), the lord's notice icon appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed to show that the notice icon is stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing that is greatly delayed from the timing at which the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially at the center of the remaining one treasure chest TR3. As shown in FIG. 58 (13), the treasure chest TR3 moves upward, but is not opened, and a letter “failure” is displayed, indicating that the timing push has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure chest TR3 are not displayed, and the treasure chest TR3 is erased as it is as shown in FIG. 58 (14). If the timing push fails, the contents of the treasure box are displayed, but may not be stocked if the contents of the treasure box is a notice icon. Further, in this effect example, when the function of the auto button is enabled for the effect button 136, the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is an abbreviation of each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure chest may be opened assuming that the production button 136 is operated at the center timing, or the auto button function may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini-game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (15) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is deleted and the mini game using the button reception time meter MT is completed. The Sabohani notice icon I71 and Tonosama notice icon I72 are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (16) shakes with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. Temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 2”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button reception time meter MT A state in which the notice display using the symbol has an influence on the subsequent decorative symbol variation display is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (18), the special symbol 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display in the special symbol display device 212 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. And displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The Sabohani notice icon I71 and Tonosama notice icon I72 are continuously displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (19) following FIG. 58 (18) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (20), the Sabohani notice icon I71 moves to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged, and the Sabohani notice icon I71 is digested. .

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (21), the change icon h0 in the default display form displayed in the change icon display area 280 changes to the display form of the savory, and the notice display by the change icon h0 is displayed. Is shown. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may change when the Sabohani notice icon I71 is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (21), after the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (22) deletes the enlarged Sabohan notice icon I71. As shown in FIG. 59 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (24), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (25), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character “Geki Atsu”, which informs that it has reached the reach state, and the reliability of the jackpot in this reach. It is suggested that it is expensive. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (27) shows a state in which a normal reach effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (28), the state that the Tono-like notice icon I72 is enlarged and displayed is moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the Tono-like notice icon I72 is digested. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has developed into super reach (subjugation reach). When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (30), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (31), the strong design image CI1a is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 as shown in FIG. 59 (32). As shown in FIG. 59 (28), the strong cut-in image CI1a appears as a result of digestion of the lord's notice icon I72. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. Even when there is no strong cut-in image CI1a, the operation effective period may be displayed. In addition, in the above-described mini game, Tonen-sama's notice icon I72 is scheduled to appear. However, if the presentation button 136 fails to be pressed and the Ton-sama's notice icon I72 does not appear, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (33), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. The symbol “decoration 5” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 5-ornament 5-ornament 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (34), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5 -decoration 5 -decoration 5”, and then FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  In this effect example, as a result of the mini game, a notice icon indicating that a button operation effect that performs the notice display using the button reception time meter MT described above is executed may be stocked. That is, a pre-reading notice of the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 will be described. Although shown, the illustration display device 210 and the illustration holding lamp 216 are not shown. 61 to 72, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the same as the stop symbol mode shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and (b). Has been. 61 to 72 show the pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208, but with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 61 to 72 can be applied as it is or after appropriately changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. Nor.

  First, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 60A is a diagram illustrating another example of the decorative symbols, and FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating combinations of symbols that are chances of prefetching notice.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the decorative symbols of the present embodiment include two special types “special 1” and “special 2” in addition to ten types of decorative symbols “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol “special 1” may be referred to as a replay symbol. For example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which “special 1” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, or “special 1” is displayed in all symbols. This is a decorative design for which a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed in the case of a stop display mode. The “special 2” decorative pattern may be referred to as a chance button pattern, and is a display mode that simply represents the button. The display mode is different from the button image 136a displayed in the button operation effect as described above. Yes. The decoration pattern of “special 2” includes, for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which “special 2” is stopped and displayed in middle symbols, a mode in which “special 2” is stopped and displayed in all symbols, etc.) In this case, it is a decorative design for which a button operation effect will be performed. Note that “special 1” and “special 2” are not always included in the variation display of the decorative symbol and appear as necessary, but they always appear in the variation display of the decorative symbol. It may be included. In addition, “special 1” and “special 2” are not fixedly displayed by a combination of decorative symbols including these, and function as a notice display for notifying the content of the effect performed thereafter. It should be noted that a combination of decorative symbols including “special 1” or “special 2” decorative symbols is displayed and functions as a pre-reading notice that an effect corresponding to “special 1” or “special 2” will be performed. It may be. Further, one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and one symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, but there may be two or more types each. In this embodiment, a “special 1” decorative symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and a “special 2” decorative symbol related to the button operation effect are prepared. Alternatively, a special decorative design corresponding to an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice, a special decorative design that specifically suggests the content of the subsequent effect, and the like may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the present embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols composed only of “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”, which is a combination other than a combination of a reach and a combination of a jackpot decorative symbol. The pre-reading notice can be displayed by confirming display with a combination of decorative symbols (sometimes referred to as “chance eyes”). Specifically, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7”, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7”, “decoration 7—decoration 3—decoration 3” The combination of the decorative pattern of “Lose” and the combination of the decorative pattern of “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3” are determined and displayed, so that the symbols that are likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display are displayed. It is informed that the variable display is included.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figure, the state of the effects progressing in the order of parenthesized numbers is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner. A special symbol “x” corresponding to the result of the loss is displayed for both the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 61 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon in FIG. 1 represents the number of hold in FIG. 1 by the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side, and the left hold icon is the older hold icon.

  In FIG. 61 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, no hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 61 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold-up icon that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. . That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is also a round, non-patterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon in FIG. Alternatively, the display mode (in this case, the shape) may be different. By doing so, the player may be able to make a determination at first glance.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → start moving animation of the hold icon → start variation of the decorative symbol. This order may be reversed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (4), the second stop is performed and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol “decorative 3-special 2-decoration 4” is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, in this effect example, it is notified that the button operation effect is started when the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Specifically, the decorative pattern “special 2” is deleted, and a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display form in place of the decorative pattern “special 2”, together with the button image 136a. A button reception time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, above the button image 136 a, a text “Press the chance button” is also displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted. At this time, the middle symbol may remain erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative pattern of “special 2” is displayed in a mode in which buttons are simply displayed as described above, whereas the button image 136a has a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, the button reception time meter MT is accompanied by a display, and it can be said that these display forms are different. Note that the “special 2” decorative symbol is not animated at least when it is stopped and displayed, but may be animated while stopped.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (8). The button reception time meter MT is erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display that influences them is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (9), after the sliding variation display is performed in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 61 (10), the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed. Each of the symbols “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (11), the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of losing. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decoration symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a chance and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify you. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 61 (11), it is foretold that the first symbol variation display hold in FIG. 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 61 (10), when the temporary stop is made at the chance, the characters “Chance” are displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance It is informed that a pre-reading notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (12), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (13), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (13), the characters “mini game” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed. A state in which the treasure chest TR is arranged is shown. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

  FIG. 61 (14) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure chest TR, as shown in FIG. 61 (16), the treasure chest TR is enlarged and moved above the timing meter, and a replay icon RP appears from the treasure chest TR. The replay icon RP displays a display in which a question mark is added to the characters “continue”, and informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the replay icon RP functions as a notice of the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation display. That is, in this production example, the replay icon RP is configured to be started more easily when the replay icon RP appears than when the replay icon RP does not appear. Here, the replay icon RP does not appear, and for example, a button icon may appear. By the appearance of the button icon, the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display. The user may be notified that a button operation effect may be performed. Here, when the icon of the button appears, it may be configured such that the “Special 2” decorative symbol is displayed and the button operation effect is more easily started than when the icon of the button does not appear. In addition, the timing meter is continuously displayed, and a long-length icon is displayed at both left and right ends of the gauge. The watch length icon displayed on the right follows the gauge reduction display and moves toward the watch length icon displayed on the left. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure chest TR1, other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon By appearing, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect is performed in the symbol variation display. That is, the button operation effect may be configured to start more easily when the button icon appears than when it does not appear. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure chest TR1, nothing may appear.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (17), the treasure chest TR is erased, the replay icon RP is displayed substantially at the center, and the effect of whether or not pseudo reaming is performed is performed. This roaring effect is continued until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses after the operation effective period is started. Until then, the gauge continues to display the gauge decrease.

  Thereafter, when the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses after the operation effective period starts and the remaining amount of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0, the decorative symbol preservation display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the question mark on the icon RP is changed to an exclamation mark, and the characters “I will continue” are displayed on the timing meter to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed. Thus, in this effect example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by displaying the icon related to the pseudo-continuous effect (replay icon RP) before the “special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There is a case where an expectation for can be given at an early stage.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (19) following FIG. 61 (18), the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (21), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (22), after the decorative symbol “special 1” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, as shown in FIG. 62 (23), “special 1” The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-special 1-decoration 4”. This “special 1” decorative symbol is a symbol in which the character “Replay” is displayed on an approximately oval shape with a moon pattern, and the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game is a graphic. Although the same in common, the displayed characters are different.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (23), the decorative symbol “special 1” stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. The appearance of this “special 1” decoration symbol is an effect performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini game shown in FIGS. 61 (13) to (18). Can do. If the above-described mini game fails, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream may be performed even if the mini-game fails.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (25), a state in which the second variation display of decorative symbols by the pseudo-ream starts is shown. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (26), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 62 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of development to super reach. When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of “Chance” notifying that a chance eye has appeared has been deleted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (29) shows a state in which a button notice effect is started. In this button notice effect, a deca button image 136aL is displayed instead of the default button image 136a. The deca button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, but has a larger display form than the button image 136a in the default form. In addition, the display mode of the big button image 136aL is the display mode of the “special 2” decorative symbol shown in FIG. 61 (5), which was displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decorative symbol variation display). It is also different. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of types of button images are prepared as button images to be displayed in the button operation effect, and the display pattern of the button image (decoration pattern of “special 2”) displayed as the decoration pattern. It can be said that it has more display patterns. Note that the default button image 136a may be displayed instead of the big button image 136aL. In this case, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the big hit symbol may be displayed more easily than when the default mode button image 136a is displayed. In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (30), as shown in FIG. 62 (31), the decorative design display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (32), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. The symbol “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A. As shown in FIG. 62 (33), when the decorative symbol is in the default display mode, the display of the “Chance” character for notifying that the chance eye has been displayed is resumed. It does not have to be.

  In this example, the button operation effect and the pseudo-ream are performed when the decoration pattern of the third stop is “special 1” or “special 2”, but “special 1” or “special 2” When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, a button operation effect or a pseudo-ream may be performed. In addition, a button operation effect or a pseudo-continuation may be performed when two of the three special symbols “special 1” or “special 2” are included.

  Further, in this effect example, the description has been made in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect that is executed by displaying the decoration symbol “special 2” in one decoration symbol variation display. The present invention also includes a comparison between the “special 2” decorative symbol displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the “special 2” decorative symbol. It can be applied as a concept.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the button operation effect is performed when three “special 2” decorative symbols are arranged, but the button operation effect is not started without three “special 2” decorative symbols being arranged. It shows how the production is being performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 63 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the first stop is performed, and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the left symbol. "Is stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (4), the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when “Special 2” is stopped on the left symbol, “Special 2” is more likely to be stopped on the right symbol than when “Special 2” is not stopped on the left symbol. Also good. This makes it difficult for the player to quickly give up on the start of the button operation effect, and allows the player to expect a sense of expectation for the button operation effect until the timing of the third stop of the decorative symbol. There are cases where it is possible. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol “special 2-decoration 4-special 2” is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed in combination, and three “special 2” s are not prepared, and it is notified that the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at a high speed, as shown in FIG. 63 (6), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 3” is displayed on the right symbol. ”Is displayed in a stopped state, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of“ decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 3 ”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (7),“ decoration 4 -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 3”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, a pseudo-continuous production is performed when three “special 1” decorative symbols are arranged, and a button operation effect is produced when three “special 2” decorative symbols are arranged. It shows what happens. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 64 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 63 (1) to (4), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (4), after the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (5) performs the third stop. The decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in a form in which three “special 2” are arranged.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (6), the decorative symbol starts to be displayed again and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing a state where the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 also starts to vibrate and rotate the internal mechanism. It should be noted that when the effect button 136 is vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated, the effect button 136 is likely to be a big hit (the big win symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed) than when the effect button 136 is not vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated. ) Is configured as follows. This button operation effect can be said to be a notice effect that a chance eye appears in the symbol variation display, and is a pre-reading notice effect that predicts that there is a high probability of being a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It can be said. The button image 136a having the default display mode described above may be displayed instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be blinked, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, it may be displayed in another display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button). At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. Thus, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 (at least one of vibration and rotation) can be displayed, and the display mode of “special 2” Can be said to have a different display. In this effect example, the effect button 136 may only vibrate, and a button image showing a state corresponding to the vibration may be displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136 may be displayed. And a button image showing a state of rotation corresponding to this may be displayed. Further, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which the effect button 136 is neither in vibration nor in rotation. In addition, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, in the state where the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. May be displayed. Conversely, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, but the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (7), the decoration symbol is displayed as a default as shown in FIG. 64 (8). In addition to the variable display as a mode, multiple star symbols are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, and a display that influences the decorative symbol that is variable is displayed. Is called.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (9), after a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, FIG. 64 (10) The confirmation is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decoration symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a chance and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify you. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 64 (10), it is foretold that the first symbol variation display hold in FIG. 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 64 (9), when the temporary stop is made at the chance, the character “Chance” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. It is informed that a pre-reading notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (11), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (12), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (12), the characters “mini game” and “press with good timing” are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed. A state in which the treasure chest TR is arranged is shown. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge displayed in a reduced manner as time passes passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

  FIG. 64 (13) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. 64 (15), the treasure box Is switched to a display showing the appearance of the BF's face symbol BF. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (16), after the character “continue” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 64 (17), the character “continue” is added to the variation icon h0, and the symbol variation display is performed. It is notified in advance that a pseudo-ream will be performed at. The variation icon h0 to which the “continuation” character is added can also be said to be an example of a display pattern of an effect design for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, a plurality of types of notification modes for performing pseudo-continuations may be prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (18), the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (19) following FIG. 64 (18), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (20), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (21), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the three “special 1” are temporarily arranged. Stop display (temporary stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (22), a copanda character appears, the character is displayed “one more time”, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. As described above, the decorative symbol for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed has one display mode (decorative symbol of “special 1”). However, the design of the effect for informing that the pseudo-ream is performed. A plurality of display modes are prepared, and variations are increasing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (23) shows a state in which the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (24), a state in which the selection effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side and a button reception time meter MT is shown below the boxes. Here, the box arranged on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box arranged on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Above the two boxes BXL and BXR, an operation key image 137p schematically representing the operation key unit 137 is displayed in a manner in which the left and right button portions are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. “Select” characters are displayed to prompt the user. The left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXR is displayed in a manner surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this production example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d of the operation key unit 137 between the start of the operation effective period and the end of the operation effective period. When either one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, an appearance corresponding to the selected box is shown. The operation key image 137p is an image that is displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative symbol for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, no special symbol for notifying that the operation effect is performed is not prepared. Note that an image simulating the operation key unit 137 may be separately prepared as a special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed.

  Then, after the operation reception period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (25), as shown in FIG. The cursor CSL surrounding the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXL.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (27), when the operation reception period has passed and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT has run out, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (28) does not select it. The left box BXL is deleted, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and a replay icon RP appears in a state in which a question mark is added nearby. That is, the replay icon RP is different from the display pattern of the “special 1” decorative symbol in that a question mark is added. Thereby, it is notified that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, since a question mark is added to the replay icon RP, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. For this reason, there is a case where the pseudo-ream is not performed and ends with a gas. In addition, there may be a case where the question mark is not attached and the display is performed in a manner that guarantees that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. When the replay icon RP appears from the box, the pseudo-ream is always performed. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (29), the character “continue” is added to the change icon h0, and the change icon display area 280 is displayed corresponding to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed at the top, and this also informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (30), the selection effect is finished and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (31), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (32), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (33), the enlarged “Special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. At this time, the special symbol “special 1” may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect, or the special symbol “special 1” may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (34), the characters “one more time” are displayed below the decorative symbol “special 1”, and the question mark displayed above the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. The exclamation mark is changed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. As described above, in this production example, after reaching the reach state, the “special 1” decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed to start the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the quasi-ream is not performed, the reach effect may be performed after the “Special 1” decorative symbol is scrolled down without stopping, and the reach effect may be performed. One of the decorative symbols other than the special symbols may be stopped and displayed on the symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols for the losing pattern or the combination of the decorative symbols for the jackpot may be derived.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (35) shows a state where the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (36), a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the variation icon h0, and a display as if the variation icon h0 is affected is performed. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (37) following FIG. 65 (36), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. That is, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the notice. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 65 (36) to 66 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may change instead of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (38), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (39), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “super hot” to notify that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). When the super reach state is reached, a decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (41), the button notice effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (41), instead of the button image 136a, a protruding button image 136aS schematically representing a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward is displayed. This suggests that it is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed) than when the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. In the protruding button image 136aS, a spear character is added to the front side, and a character “Please push” is displayed below the character to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the production button 136 does not have a function of projecting upward, the state of the production button 136 does not correspond to the display mode of the projecting button image 136aS. 136 may be provided with a function capable of projecting upward. In this case, the effect button 136 may be projected upward in accordance with the display of the projecting button image 136aS, or may not be projected. . In the button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (42), the strong design image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 66 (43).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (44), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. The symbol “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (45), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, and then FIG. ), The decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, “A” indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol form of special figure A.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (4) to (6), when the notice using the button reception time meter MT is not performed, the button reception time is operated when the effect button 136 is operated. Although the meter MT is erased, for example, the button reception time meter MT may be continuously displayed even when the effect button 136 is operated, and the effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display or an effect display that is not a notice display.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (3), “decoration 3” is displayed on the left symbol from the top of the display screen. It shows scrolling in and moving downwards. At this time, “decoration 3” is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols fluctuate and display at a high speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (4), the “decoration 3” of the left symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, the “decoration 3” of the left symbol is moved to the front side. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display is performed as if it affects the “decoration 3” of the left symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (5), after the “decoration 3” in the left symbol is changed to the “special 2” ornament symbol, the display is stopped. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the design is changed to a “special 2” symbol that simply represents the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (6), the right symbol “decoration 1” is scrolled in from the top of the display screen and is moving downward. . At this time, “Decoration 1” is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (7), the “decoration 1” of the right symbol moves at an extremely low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, the “decoration 1” of the right symbol is moved to the front side of the “decoration 1” of the right symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display is performed as if it affects the “decoration 1” of the right symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (8), after the “decoration 1” in the right symbol is changed to the “design 2” ornament symbol, the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (9), the middle symbol “decoration 6” is scrolled in from the top of the display screen and is moving downward. At this time, “decoration 6” is moving at a low speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (10), the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display. At this time, the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol is moved to the front side of the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and an effect display as if affecting the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (11), after the middle symbol “decoration 6” is changed to the “special 2” ornamental symbol, it is stopped and displayed in a state where three “special 2” s are arranged. Displayed (temporary stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (12), the decorative symbol starts to be displayed again and the button operation effect is started. The effect shown in FIG. 67 (12) is the same as that shown in FIG. 64 (6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this production example, a state is shown in which the decoration button is changed to a “special 2” decoration design that simply imitates the production button 136 immediately before the decoration design is stopped. A mode in which “special 2” is interrupted in the order in which the decorative symbols are arranged, and the “special 2” is stopped and displayed immediately before the display is performed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of “decoration 1”> “decoration 2”>...> “Decoration 10”, “decoration 1” and “decoration” immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decoration pattern of “special 2” may be inserted between “decoration 2”, and “special 2” may be stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (5), the appearance that the decorative symbol “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward is shown. This “special 2” decorative design is an extra large display mode that is larger than the normal display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are erased, and only the special symbol “special 2”, which is the middle symbol, is stopped (temporarily stopped). It is shown. Thus, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode based on the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed in the stop display mode based on one decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (7), a simple button image 136aX simulating a “special 2” decorative symbol is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. In other words, the simplified button image 136aX has a button display portion in common with a decorative symbol whose display mode is “special 2”, but it has a special symbol “special 2” in that it is displayed together with at least the button reception time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different. The display form of the simplified button image 136aX may be a form in which the character display of “Chance” is omitted from the display form of the decoration pattern of “Special 2”. In this case, although the shape of the button is common, It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX and the display mode of the “special 2” decorative symbol are different depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (7), the decorative symbol is not displayed. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 may display a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (5), a special symbol “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, but a button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decorative symbol “special 2” is scrolled downward without displaying the stop, and then “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (6 ′). Then, after the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed, the display may be fixedly displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3—decoration 6—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (3), the first stop is performed, and the special symbol 1 is displayed on the left symbol. "Is stopped. The special symbol “Special 1” in this production example is added with a character for notifying the number of pseudo-reams. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), the special symbol “Special 1” is displayed. Is added with a character “× 1” for notifying that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. For the “special 1” in the right design, the character “× 1” is added to notify that there is a possibility that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the three “special 1” symbols are temporarily displayed. Stopped display. Also here, the character “× 1” for notifying that “special 1” in the middle symbol may be subjected to the first pseudo-ream is added.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (6), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is deleted, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is an extra large size display mode is displayed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Thus, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode based on the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed in the stop display mode based on one decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (7), a state is shown in which the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (8), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The special symbol “special 1” shown in FIG. 69 (8) is also added with characters for informing the number of pseudo-reams, and “× 2” is informed that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. Is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (9), the second stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. For the “special 1” in the right design, a character “× 2” is added to notify that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (10), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “special 1” is arranged in the form of three. Stopped display. Also here, the character “× 2” is added to notify that “special 1” in the middle symbol may be subjected to the second pseudo-ream.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (11), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is deleted, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is the display mode of the extra large size is performed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (12), a state is shown in which the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “× 3” indicating the number of times that the third variation of decorative symbol display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  As described above, in this production example, the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the “special 1” decorative symbol, but the display mode of the “special 1” decorative symbol itself is changed according to the number of pseudo-reams. You may do it. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo-reams.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 70 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (2), and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (3), the first stop is performed, and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the left symbol. "Is stopped. The decorative pattern “special 2” in this production example is displayed in a form in which a mini-character BCH is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Unlike the “special 2” decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the decorative symbol “special two” in the right symbol is displayed in a form in which a panda mini character PND is added. In this effect example, even with the same “special 2” decorative symbol, since the added symbol is different, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition that reach has occurred. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The decorative symbol “special 2” in the middle symbol is displayed in the same manner as the “special 2” decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol, with a mini-character BCH of the number length added. As a result, the “special 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a form in which three “special 2” s are arranged. In this production example, the type of mini character added to the “special 2” stopped and displayed on the right pattern is different. . That is, in this production example, even when three “special 2” s are arranged, the display mode of at least one of “special 2” is different from the display mode of other “special 2”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent misidentification that a big hit has occurred. In this production example, the display mode of “special 2” stopped and displayed on the right symbol is the same as the display mode of “special 2” stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. All of the display modes may be different. In addition, the types of mini characters added to the three “special 2” may all be the same (for example, all three “special 2” are added with the mini character BCH of the head length) In this case, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the types of the mini characters added to the three “special 2” are not all the same (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Also good.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (6) shows a state in which the button operation effect is started by stopping and displaying three “special 2” decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing a state in which the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Further, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is added with a mini-character BCH having a long length, and in this respect, it can be said that the display pattern is the same as the above-mentioned “special 2” decorative symbol. At this time, the effect button 136 is not vibrated or rotated and is in a normal state, but the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism may be started. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that the mini character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini character other than the mini-character BCH (for example, a panda mini character PND). At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of additionally displayed mini character. For example, the miniature character BCH having a longer length is displayed than when the panda mini character PND is displayed. In some cases, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher. Further, as in the example of production shown in FIG. 67 (12), there may be a case where the mini character is not additionally displayed. When the mini character is additionally displayed, the big hit is greater than when the mini character is not additionally displayed. May have a high reliability (a big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the above-described default display button image 136a may be displayed. At this time, a long mini character BCH or a panda mini character PND may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (7), the character “× 1” is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (8). Is displayed in a state where three decorative symbols of “special 1” with “” added are arranged, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Note that the above-mentioned mini character may be added to the “special 1” decorative symbol and displayed. In this case, at least one of the three “special 1” decorative symbols may be displayed as another “special one”. It may be different from the mini-character with the decorative pattern "" to prevent misperception of the big hit or the reach state.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (9), the decorative symbol in which three “special 1” s are arranged is erased. Instead, the decorative symbol stop display of “special 1” which is the display mode of the extra large size is performed. The state of being done is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (10) shows a state in which the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream starts. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 61 (1) to (7), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are deleted, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second hold icon h12, and a display that affects these is performed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, “decoration 4” is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving toward the stop position of the middle symbol due to the low-speed fluctuation.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (9) shows that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button preview display mode. In other words, this button notice display mode is a pre-read notice display mode. The display mode of the button notice differs from the display mode of the “special 2” decorative pattern in that the characters “Chance” are not displayed and an animation for prompting button operation is displayed. . The middle symbol continues to fluctuate at low speed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (10), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, the display is confirmed and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 4”. At this time, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4 design t1, “x” indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. The second hold icon h12 that has changed to a button image has not yet changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (12), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Fluctuation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started, and the special symbol first and fourth symbol t1 variation display is also started. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12, which has been the button notice display mode, continues to move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Is done.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the button notification display mode to the display of the savory as shown in FIG. 71 (14). It is changed to a mode. This suggests that the first symbol variation display that is reserved is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 72 (A) is a diagram showing another example of button effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 (B) is a simulation executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure shown about the other example of a continuous production.

  72A1 to 72A2 show a state in which the contents of the button operation effect are suggested by the decorative symbol “special 2”. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (A1) shows a state where the “special 2” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, respectively. In this effect example, the display mode of “special 2” stopped on the middle symbol is different from the display mode of “special 2” stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the effect button 136 is simulated. It is considered as an embodiment. In the middle symbol “special 2”, the word “pending change” is displayed on the upper surface, and when the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect, the holding icon (or variation icon) is displayed. It has been notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, it can be said that the decorative symbol “special 2” of the middle symbol is a dedicated display mode for notifying that the change icon of the hold icon due to the button hold is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (A2), a state in which the button operation effect is started is shown. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the decorative symbol having three “special 2” s, and displays a button image 136a represented in an extra large size instead. The state of being done is shown. On the upper surface of the button image 136a, a character “change on hold” is displayed to notify that the change icon of the hold icon due to the button hold is being notified. The button image 136a is different from the special display mode "special 2" in that the display mode is the same, but an animation that promotes button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that the button image 136a shown in FIG. 72 (A2) and the “special 2” decorative symbol of the dedicated display mode shown in FIG. 72 (A1) share a part of the display mode. On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h <b> 11 in the button hold display mode has a character “push” displayed on the upper surface thereof, and prompts the operation of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is deleted, and the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode is changed to another display mode (for example, the display mode of Sabohani, the default display mode, or the like). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (B), a pseudo-run announcement icon acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. This pseudo-renewal notice icon is a notice icon that is displayed with the character of “pseudo-ream” added to the Tono-sama character, and may be displayed as both a pre-read notice and a notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (B) shows a state where three “special 1” decorative symbols are arranged and a pseudo-run is generated. In FIG. 72B, the pseudo-continuous notice icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen is not related to the display in which three decoration patterns of “special 1” are arranged. Both may be related. Here, the display mode is different between the display mode of the pseudo-reminder notice icon and the display mode of the “special 1” decoration symbol, and the player can clearly distinguish the notification icon from the decoration symbol. There is.

  In the embodiment described so far, the main display device having a large screen size and one or a plurality of sub display devices having a smaller screen size than the main display device may be provided. For example, a symbol displayed on a sub display device having a screen size smaller than that of the main display device than a symbol (decorative symbols, button images, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device having a large screen size. May be displayed larger.

<< Embodiment 3 >>
Next, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  In FIG. 73, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (2), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 starts from the right side of the display screen, whereby the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown starts when the timer preview display TM1 starts, but after the timer preview display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 73 (3)). You may make it start a countdown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 73 (3) to (7), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00” is reached. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 73 (8), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. In this way, a cut-in display composed of the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit. Note that the pseudo-continuous symbol may be out of the frame without stopping, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol is out of the frame, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the decorative pattern of the loss is not changed. The combination may be displayed in a stopped state, or a reach effect may be started in a reach state. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice is given to notify that the pseudo-ream starts after the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 73 (3a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 73 (2). In this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, suggesting that a notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 73 (10a) to (11a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. 73 (10a), (11a), and (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 73 (10), (11), and (14), respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 73 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 73 (16a), the timer notice display TM1 has a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. At this time, the right design changes from “decoration 6” to “decoration 7”. The right design may remain unchanged as “decoration 6”. Then, as shown in FIGS. 73 (16a) to (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. In this way, the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 73 (3a) to (17a) notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. In addition, the fact that the second quasi-run is forewarned can be said that the start of the first quasi-run is also foreseen. In other words, in this production example, It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-ream is foretold. Note that in the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but another kind of notice or notice of the production of an effect may be given.

  FIG. 73 (7b) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 73 (6). 73 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 73 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the state where the countdown is completed is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (8b-1), instead of the “notice” character display in the timer notice display TM1, the face image of the Tono-sama character with a balloon line “Ikuze” added. YMF is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. In this way, attention to the notice may be urged by a display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed, and means for prompting attention to the notice is not limited to display, but may be performed by voice or lamp, or by combining two or more of display, voice, and lamp. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (9 b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the Tono-sama character is deleted, as shown in FIG. 73 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (12), a cut-in display including the Tono-sama character and the “continuation” character display is performed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous) starts, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. However, there may be a case where an effect corresponding to this is not performed.

Further, another notice may be performed while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer notice display TM1. In this case, the notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIG. 74 (a1) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 73 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 74 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that urges attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (a2), a display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and points the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 74 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Note that the pre-reading notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, the reach state by “decoration 7” occurs as shown in FIG. 74 (a7). Thus, it can be said that the timer notice effect in this effect example is an effect for notifying that the notice is to be performed.

  FIG. 74 (b1) shows a state after the timer notice effect starts. In the timer notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started as “30:00”, that is, the notice effect that 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. Is suggested to start. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “29:69”. As described above, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the countdown time. The shorter the jackpot, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the higher the jackpot reliability, regardless of the countdown time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b2), about eight seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, and the reach effect of “decoration 7” has started in the first decorative symbol. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays the change icon h0. The frame is framed out at the bottom of the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 74 (b4), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b4) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 74 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the main character and the enemy characters. Animation display of duel scene with swordsman begins. During this time, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continued. As shown in FIG. 74 (b5), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 74 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with a notice. The word “attention” is displayed in order to prompt attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters “heat” are added to the variation icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the state where the timer notice effect is continuously performed after the transition to the reach state is shown.

  FIG. 74 (b4′-2) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 74 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b4′-2), after the start of the duel scene animation display, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37”. Yes. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have elapsed after the countdown by the timer notice effect is started is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer notice effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (b5 ′), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 74 (b6 ′). "Attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (b7 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters “heat” are added to the variation icon h0. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is performed during the execution of the button effect.

  In the above-described effect example, the example in which the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed as an effect performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to make a notice.

  FIG. 74 (b6 ′ ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 74 (b5). When the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 74 (b6 ′ ″), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (b6 ″ ″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed and the notice display is performed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit trust. It is shown that the display has been switched to a cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed in large size on the right side of the display screen, and the characters “Cushion” suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display in which a big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which two or more notice displays are performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown. Note that the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 74 (c1) to (c2) show how the lever production starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the notice of the notice is urged instead of the timer display. The “Attention” characters are displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, the production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production buttons 136 as production operation means.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the lever effect is started is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the lever effect is started as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

  Note that there may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, a button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). A button image 136a in which a character notation (for example, “Intense heat” or “Expectation large”) or a character is added to the default mode, and a button image 136a having a different size from the default mode (for example, a deca button effect or a mini button) The button image 136a (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed more than the default mode) is operated as many times as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times). The number of operations may be different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.). In addition, the response display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a or a number different from the number of button images 136a. etc).

74 (d1) to FIG. 74 (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. As shown in FIG. 74 (d1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the reach is “decoration 7” in the first decorative symbol and the reach effect is being performed. In the first UI unit 280, the change icon h0 is left and is framed downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed downward. In addition, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (d1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (d2), in the timer notice display TM1, a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (d3), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production, it is shown that the first large board acting character Ga to the fourth large board acting machine Gd as the production movable body operate. The thing 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H may be operated, and two or more of the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd, the family crest character 224E, and the thousand car box role 224H are operated. May be.
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 75 (1), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (2), a state in which a timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-ream effect, a chance-up notice, a pre-read notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 75 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), an effect is added in which time is added by displaying a count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at a high speed. Note that the count-up animation display need not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 75 (4a), the effect image may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is difficult to visually recognize, After the effect image shown in FIG. 75 (4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 75 (4) may be displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of adding the timer. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, and after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed), the first pseudo-continuous effect is obtained. Is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In this production example, when a timer addition effect is performed and time is added to the timer display, it is easier to win a big hit than when time addition is not performed. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

  75 (1b) to FIG. 75 (b) show a state in which the timer addition effect by the conversation notice is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1b) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1b), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. In the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 75 (1b), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1b), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 75 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and a conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed in which a character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. Note that the timing at which the timer notice effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation notice is started, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (2b), the conversation notice has been updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 is displayed on which a character display of “I will add 10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM. Note that the timer display countdown in the timer notice effect is continued. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the habit conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (4b), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the niece are erased and the conversation preview ends, as shown in FIG. 75 (6b), the count-up animation display ends, and the timer display on the timer preview display TM is displayed. It is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (4b′-1) to FIG. 75 (4b′-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing when the conversation notice ends and the timing when the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  75 (1c) to FIG. 75 (c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1c) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1c), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is displayed in the second hold number display. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In FIG. 75 (1c), the timer notice effect described above is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (1c), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 75 (1c), the conversation announcement has started, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama in which the character display of “chance” is displayed together with the character of Tono-sama. Note that the part of the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (2c-1), the conversation notice has been updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The frog conversation image CI2 on which the above-described operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the execution of the conversation notice.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (2c-2). FIG. 75 (2c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation effective period has started, and the length corresponding to the elapsed time of the gauge length of the remaining time display meter MT. It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 75 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears and the player is informed accordingly. The Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (3c), the display of the habit conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display “10 seconds added” indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. In addition, when the production button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period, the time display in the timer display may not be added. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then may be changed to a character display of “I will add 10 seconds”. You may make it change into the character display of "it is an addition for 10 seconds", without performing the display which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT lose | disappears. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the character display “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed after the operation effective period elapses. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display in which 10 seconds is added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed may be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (4c), an effect is added in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The timing when ending and the timing when counting-up animation display ends may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the samurai are erased and the conversation preview is finished, the count-up animation display is finished as shown in FIG. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 75 (6c) shows a state where the timer display counts down to “09:85” after 10 seconds have been added to the timer display time.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the operation valid period. After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 75 (2c-3 ′), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not performed during the operation effective period. (The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75 (2c-4 ′), The countdown update table is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 (eg, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (2c-4 ′)). The may be resumed.

Also, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 75 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer notice effect is updated in the operation effective period. No display is performed (the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at “06:00”), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 75 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, the internal time measurement result is not reflected, and as shown in FIG. 75 (3c ″), the display of the frog conversation image CI2 indicates the time that is added from the operation promotion notification image. Reflect the internal time measurement result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (3c ″)) in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 at the timing when the character display is changed The update display of the countdown may be resumed.
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  FIG. 76 (1d) to FIG. 76 (2d) show another example of effects of FIG. 75 (1b) to FIG. 75 (2b). In FIG. 76 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is “Attention to timer notice”. Thereby, attention may be paid to the effect (preliminary notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”. That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 in FIG. 76 (1d).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned habit conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this way, after the timer notice effect is noticed, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

  FIG. 76 (1e) shows another example of the effect of FIG. 76 (1d). In FIG. 76 (1e), the timer display is “00” by performing a scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 instead of the conversation image CI1. You may make it pay attention to the production performed as a result of becoming 0:00. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 76 (1e), the characters “attention to timer notice” loop and scroll from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 76 (1f) to (6f) are other examples of the timer addition production, and the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Show. FIG. 76 (1f) is an example of the production following FIG. 75 (3), and after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1. It shows the frame in from the right end. In this extra timer display TM2, “10:00” indicating the extra time is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. Note that the extra timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap. Further, the extra timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 76 (2f) shows a state in which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 has been completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the navigation character YM balloon may be deleted after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, or after the navigation character YM balloon is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. May be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 76 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer advance notice display TM1, but the timer advance notice display TM1 and the added timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap, for example, As shown in FIG. 76 (2f ′), the added timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 76 (2f ″), the timer preview display TM1 is displayed. You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 76 (2f) to (4f), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until “00:00”. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (5f), the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started and the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be framed out to the right end of the display screen. . Here, after the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, a frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (5f ′), the “notice” character display may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (6f), there is a case where a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol and a pseudo-ream is performed in response to the completion of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. This indicates that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo continuous symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed on the added timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. ing. The notification of the added time may be notification of the sum of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time is displayed on the add timer display TM2. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The added timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice that is newly displayed as the timer is added, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the timer is added.

  FIGS. 76 (3fa) to (8fa) are further examples of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows a state. FIG. 76 (3fa) is a production example following FIG. 76 (2f), and after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. The state of starting is shown. In other words, in this production example, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but an additional 5 seconds is actually performed. The timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to 10 seconds that is the additional time so that an additional 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 76 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, the countdown continues in the manner shown in FIGS. 76 (3f) to (6f). In FIG. 76 (7fa), the pseudo-symbol symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the pseudo-sequel is performed. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (8fa), the first decorative symbol variable display is started again, and the first pseudo-ream is being performed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “× 2” below the second decorative symbol indicating that the second variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word “attention” is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream starts. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 76 (9fa ′), a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as an effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, it may be suggested that a notice effect or a big hit other than the pseudo-ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the addition timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the addition timer display TM2. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change in the display form of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “2” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 2 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the watch warning icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that the time will be added in the timer notice effect. Note that the timer notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed along with the decorative pattern, but various kinds of notification such as temporary stop of the notice icon pattern, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display by the effect, a pre-read notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows a state in which the stand on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas where the notice icons are displayed are arranged in the horizontal direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (4), the watch notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and stocked. In the first decorative design, a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right design is shown. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops may be the same as the timing at which the watch warning icon MI1 starts moving, or the warning icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (5), the watch warning icon MI1 is reduced and stored in the leftmost area of the warning icon display area 285, and the watch warning icon MI1 is stocked. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (5), a combination of lost decorative symbols in which the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. The state of being confirmed and displayed is shown. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, or the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be fixedly displayed, or after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the clock warning icon MI1 may be stored in the warning icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol variation display is performed after one reservation of the special diagram 1 is consumed. Also, the timer notice effect has started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notice display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of the notice icon). Conversely, there may be an effect display for overlapping the timer notice only during execution of an effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (7), the effect is displayed around the clock notice icon MI1 stored in the notice icon display area 285, and the use of the clock notice icon MI1 is announced. . In the timer notice display TM1, “07:31” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (8), the clock notice icon MI1 pops out of the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at the approximate center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (9), the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted, and the display of the count-up animation is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation is displayed, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The watch notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (10), the notice icon display area 285 frames out downward.
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  78 (A1) to FIG. 78 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (A2), a state where “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. Further, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters “added” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. It should be noted that even if the “addition” character display is performed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (A3a-1), after displaying the characters “attention” to urge attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 78 (A3a-2) Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this production example, the production to be displayed as “attention” is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters “still still” indicating that the timer preview effect continues, the display of the timer preview display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 78 (A3b-1), after the characters “still still” are displayed on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and “+10” indicating the time to be added to the balloon. “Second” may be displayed. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 78 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 78 (A3b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to “10:00”, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”. The situation is shown. Note that the timing at which the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (B1) to (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06:99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (B1), a balloon with a character “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for the timer notice effect is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display indicates “05:89”. Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is “−3 seconds” indicating the shortened time instead of the character display of “subtraction”. That is, the timer notice effect may be shortened by 3 seconds, and it may be recognized that the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the originally displayed time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed is performed. Note that the shortened animation display need not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the state in which the time in the timer display is reduced (subtracted) by 3 seconds is shown. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the effect of shortening the timer. While the timer shortening effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 78 (B5), a “notice” character is displayed to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. A pine symbol CC as a chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol, so that a notice is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 78 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-continuous symbol is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the “notice” character on the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped, or the “notice” character may be displayed. After the start of display, the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the characters “attention” May start displaying. In addition, the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or the timer display in the timer notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and the pseudo-continuous notification is easily performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer notice effect, the above-described pine symbols CC, etc. You may make it easy to make a high-reliability advance notice. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-continuous notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 78C1 to C2 shows another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (C1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (C1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06:99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (C1), a balloon with characters “timer notice level UP” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the big hit for the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display countdown being performed, it is notified that a highly reliable notice may be given as a notice to be executed.

  78 (D1) to FIG. 78 (D5) show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (D1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (D1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (D1), a balloon displaying “stop” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the timer display countdown is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the balloon with the word “stop” starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is interrupted, or the balloon with the letter “stop” started to display. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the timer display countdown is interrupted, a balloon with the word “stop” added may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (D2), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is being performed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains “06:99”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo-ream. Has been. Note that “× 2” is displayed below the second decorative symbol, which indicates that the second variation of the decorative symbol is displayed by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (D3), a balloon displaying “Resume” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (D4), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 78 (D5). As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect ends. Has been.

  As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice displays TM1 may change (increase or decrease) than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, if it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more. When three notice displays TM1 are displayed and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may decrease to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 informing 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10 The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 for notifying 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 for notifying 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may be started to count down at the same timing or at different timings.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step. In the effect example shown in FIG. 79, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, a sub display device 208 </ b> S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest character 224 </ b> E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the illustration of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box machine 224H is omitted for easy explanation.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 79A1 to 79A6 shows another example of the timer addition effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 79A1, a balloon displaying the characters “+10 seconds” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and its upper right corner overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and the time in the timer display is increased by 10 seconds. It is shown. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (A6), in the sub display device 208S, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Note that, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  79 (B1) to FIG. 79 (B7) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 79 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character “+10 seconds”, and is added to the timer display in the timer / notice display TM1. The time to be notified is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The production will add time. Note that at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped. The timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, or the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display. The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (B4) to FIG. 79 (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the extra time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by 1 second. . In this example, while the countdown display of the extra time is being performed, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is “0 seconds”, the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. Updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer preview display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the timer display time in the timer preview display TM1 is difficult to specify. Also good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (B6), the sub display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display device 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 79 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. In the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display countdown is resumed, and the timer display is “14:23” at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (B7). Thereafter, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 79 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S begins to descend. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be resumed after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. In addition, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown is resumed, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the timer display countdown may be resumed, or after the timer display countdown is resumed, “Restart” may be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

  79 (C1) to FIG. 79 (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (C1), a balloon with a character “+10 seconds” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is informed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (C1), the display of the sucking animation in which the timer preview display TM1 sucks the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S is started, and the sucking animation is started from the timer preview display TM1. An effect image showing how the image is being displayed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S is overlapped with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a surprised expression.

  FIG. 79 (C3) shows a state where the blotting animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” sucked in the timer advance notice TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer advance notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to the sub display device 208S. Are displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 starts displaying the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed in the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. The state of heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced is shown. While the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (an animation accompanying the sucking animation) by looking at the sucking animation. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely sucked by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then the timer is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (C6). The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer notice effect may be performed only by one decorative symbol display device.
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 80A1 to 80A4 shows another example of the timer addition effect. 80 (A1) to FIG. 80 (A4) will be described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). However, for the sake of easy explanation, A part of the 1 large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd and the thousand carton box playing 224H will be described without description.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (A2), the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is time-added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth large board acting 224Gd out of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, so that the timer display shows 10 Although it is informing that the addition of the second is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the activated actuating items among the first enormous acting item 224Ga to the fourth enormous acting member 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Moreover, in this production example, the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated only once, thereby notifying that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. Depending on the number of times, the extra time may be different. For example, when the second large board acting 224Gb and the fourth big board acting 224Gd are operated three times, an additional 30 seconds is added to the timer display. May be.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 80 (B1) to (B4) show an example of a timer addition production using the family crest member 224E. 80 (B1) to FIG. 80 (B4) will be described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), but for the sake of easy explanation, the first large board acting The description of 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (B2), the family crest actor 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Operate in the direction. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the overlapped crest character 224E. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be displayed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 starts an effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this production example, the crest character 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is added for 10 seconds. However, the additional time may be varied depending on the number of operations. For example, when the family crest actor 224E operates three times, an additional 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 80 (C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 80C1 to C6, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 80 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, “1” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, and a timer display is counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 80 (C1), “05:00” is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes “05:00”, the countdown is interrupted, and “05:00” The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interrupting the countdown.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters “additional 10 seconds” are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction close to each other, As shown in FIG. 80 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving. After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions, the timer display countdown in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. The Note that the timer display countdown is performed in a state where the display of “15:00” is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 80 (C4)). May be resumed. If the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, it may be configured to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of winning big hits may be the same, or it may be configured so that it is difficult to win big hits.
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice effect step by step.

  81 (A1) to FIG. 81 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 81A1 to 81A4, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that illustration of the family crest character 224E and the Senryo box character 224H is omitted for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect provided on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 81 (A1), “05:89” is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and “15:89” is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction close to each other. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but may be interrupted. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 81 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The times indicated by the respective timer displays displayed on 208N are added together, and the display of “20:00” indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed at a position corresponding to the display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, they are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 81 (A3) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of “20:00” displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In accordance with the movement of 208N, the displayed coordinates are scrolled while being maintained. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of “20:00” to the right according to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. Scrolls the display of “20:00” to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of “20:00” is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol. When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 81 (A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 81 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first one. It is likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the likelihood of a big hit may be the same or a big hit may be difficult).

  81 (B1) to FIG. 81 (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 81 (B1) to 81 (B3), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. 81 (B1) to FIG. 81 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, a part of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and a part of the thousand box machine 224H. The description is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed, while the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In FIG. 81 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotational speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 81 (B1), the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I causes all of the first decorative symbols and the change icons h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 to be displayed. It overlaps the rotation area and is considered difficult to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (B2), the character “+10” displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display “+10” displayed only on the POV display 224I so far. Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character “+10” may be in a decorated display mode. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “+10” so as to match the display of the characters “+10” on the POV display 224I. Accordingly, there may be a case where display with a sense of unity can be performed between the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, as shown in FIG. 81 (B3), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

  81 (C1) to FIG. 81 (C5) show other examples of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIGS. 81 (C1) to (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 81 (B1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In FIG. 81 (C1), the POV display 224I rises from the initial position to the position on the front side at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and does not rotate. Note that all of the variation icons h0, the first decorative symbols, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which is more difficult to see than when they are not overlapped.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotational speed to be rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. The timer displayed on the POV display 224I is “05:17”, and the countdown continues. Further, at this time, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 second” display, two “+2 second” display, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E. It is notified that the addition of is performed.

  Thereafter, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 81 (C3), the effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (C4), “15:00” which is the timer display after being added. Is displayed. In this production example, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (C5), the robot stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is “15:00”, and then the countdown is resumed. Note that the countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. May be the same, or may not be a big hit.

In addition, in the timer notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change until the end of the countdown after the change ends. The total time may be counted down. Internally, the time until the change before the change may be counted down, and the change time after the change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after starting the countdown, When counting down 10 seconds and displaying “attention” 5 seconds after the change, count down 5 seconds, etc.). Further, the countdown display may coincide with the time for counting down internally.
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 82, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. In this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 82 (1) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 82 (1) shows a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2), a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current reach production progress is roughly determined by the position. Is informed. Here, the traveling speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 82 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH moves to the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the road, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the display of the state developed to the super reach shown in FIG. 82 (1) is started. Display may be started at the same time, display may be started when the reach state is reached, display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative pattern changes The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (3), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that this Boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (5), a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by displaying the chance up character display. We are informing you. It should be noted that the timing at which the Boyi character BOY starts to display may be the same as the timing at which the Savohani character SBH starts to display the balloon, and the Sabohani character SBH starts to display after the Boyi character BOY starts displaying. The balloon character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the Boyi character BOY is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the check point, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or only the relevant check point may be displayed in an enlarged manner. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (7), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (9). Displayed and button production starts. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player performs a button operation or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 82 (11), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 82 (13), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . In this production example, Tono-sama's cut-in image CI3 is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode that shows wearing a sunglasses and riding a large motorcycle while turning a cigar. It is informing that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 82 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the pass is displayed. May be. This Tono-sama cut-in image CI1 shown in FIG. 82 (13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, or the effect button 136 is effective. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. 82 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in surrounded by a golden frame is displayed. It is informing that a notice has been made by displaying an image. Note that the display start timing of Tonosama cut-in image CI3 may be the same as the display start timing of balloons of Sabohani character SBH. An SBH balloon may be displayed, or after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started, the Tono-like cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the Tono-sama character image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after the arrival, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, when it is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation effective period has passed without the operation button 136 being operated, the effect button 136 is also operated when the operation button 136 is not operated. As in the case of operating 136, it may be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or it may not be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, or a chance-up notice may be issued. Only a part of the occurrence may be reported (for example, only displaying “UP” without displaying a balloon).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (16), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the savory character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (18) displays the lever image 136Va and the savory. A balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH, notifying that the advance notice by lever effect has started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. It should be noted that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon with the letters “chance up lever” added thereto. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, all may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be possible to overlap a part or all of the time up meter, and while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, part or all of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap. The up meter CMT may overlap part or all of the remaining time display meter MT, and during the display of the chance up meter CMT, part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may overlap. Also good.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. Note that the Sabohani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or until the operation valid period elapses.

    The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 82 (21) shows a state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (22) within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 82 (23), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth The large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H operate, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Note that the effects (the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box action part 224H are activated when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 82 (23) is operated, and the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated is the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H return to the initial positions, respectively, and the decorative pattern On the display device 208, the effect image fades out. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT fades in along with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. . 82 (23) to (24) are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17 (38) to (44), for example.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (25) shows a state in which the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the duel scene animation display, the enemy swordsman shows a faint expression and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character “V” indicating that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP and the placard is a big hit is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (26), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, so that a big hit is announced. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 81 (28), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the SBBO character SBH and the placard) may be displayed.

  In the above-described effect using the chance up meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or may not be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be easier to win the game than when the chance up meter CMT is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when not displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  There may also be a chance up notice that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

    Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be deleted during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

  In addition, during the performance of the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past), or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

  The effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, an effect that increases the chance may be performed. In addition, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a checkpoint, and an effect may be performed that increases the chances of winning a battle against a teammate character.

  Further, an effect using a chance up meter CMT may be performed as an effect of a chance up (for example, a rank-up bonus, a probability change promotion, a promotion to a jackpot game with more balls) during execution of the big hit game.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption / recovery. The chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, but the check point timing and the history that the chance up effect before power interruption has occurred may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  FIG. 83 (3a) is another effect example following FIG. 82 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 82 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the first check point CP1, no advance notice is given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 83 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. Passing through CP1 as it is, neither marking at the first check point CP1 nor display of the characters “UP” is performed. Thereby, at the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has not been completed. Note that, when the advance notice is not given at the first check point CP1, for example, the display of the first check point CP1 may be deleted as shown in FIG. 83 (7a ′). In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (7a ″), in place of the characters “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, “X” indicating that no chance up notice has been given. May be performed. Further, even if the chance-up notice is not actually made, it is assumed that the chance-up notice is made after the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint. For example, after marking at a checkpoint or non-display of the “UP” character, the marking or the “UP” character may be displayed. The savohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance increase and display the marking or the characters “UP”. In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and then the check point is passed by the Sabohani character SBH, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or “UP” characters are displayed. May be displayed.

  FIG. 83 (17b) is another effect example following FIG. 82 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 82 (17) is performed. Note that at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the final point GP, some event may occur. Has been suggested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (18b), not the lever image 136Va, but the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it seems that the lever effect as a notice of chance up has not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 83 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. Passing through CP3 as it is, the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the characters “UP” are not performed. FIG. 83 (19b) shows a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 83 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (21b) within the above-mentioned operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Along with the line “Is it removed?” Is displayed as if the victory or defeat is not decided. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a letter “Development” on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach effect is developed.

  Thereafter, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 83 (23b), as shown in FIG. 83 (24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the savohani character SBH rides on the flying carpet and moves toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 83 (25b) to (29b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while the Sabohani character SBH overlaps with the Sabohani character SBH on the way to the start point SP. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. 83 (28b) to FIG. 83 (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the red mark is not attached and the character display of “UP” is not performed). It has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (30b) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 83 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (30b), the copanda cheering team KPD composed of three copanda characters cheer at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice display indicating that the SP swordsman has reached is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. It can be said that this co-panda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The co-panda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (31b), a balloon with the characters “chance up copanda cheering party” is displayed near the savohani character SBH, and a warning is displayed with the chance up character display. It is informing that it has been broken. Note that the timing at which the copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying may be the same as the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts to display the balloon, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts after the copanda supporter KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the co-panda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice by the display of the co-panda cheering party KPD is being performed, but it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (32b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, “Collaboration Special” indicating that the chance-up effect is performed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of “one blow”. Is done. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by lever effect has been started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed and the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Thereafter, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 83 (23c) is another effect example following FIG. 82 (22). In the lever effects shown in FIGS. 82 (18) to (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V. It shows how the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows an “x” character indicating that it is lost, and the Sabohani character SBH has a disappointed expression. ing.

FIG. 83 (5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (5d), a state is shown in which a large number of Boyi characters BOY (a group of boys) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . In other words, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of a bouy group. When this boyfriend character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boyie character BOY appears alone. Also, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters “chance up BOY group” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, notifying that the advance notice by the chance up character display has been performed. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed even at the same chance up point, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance up point.
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  FIG. 84 (7e) is another effect example following FIG. 82 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 82 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 84 (8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the savohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 to reach the third check point CP3, and the third It waits at that place until the advance notice of the chance corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is given. While the effect that the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. 82). The button effect or the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the text “UP” may be displayed as being performed.

  FIG. 84 (2f) is another example of the effect following FIG. 82 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 84 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green bar shape, and the progress of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK instead of the savohani character SBH. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. In addition, the progression speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the performance, but may be constant. Further, the display modes of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance up notice will be given. The start point and the final point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 84 (3f) following FIG. 84 (2f) shows a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (4f), when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (5f), a balloon with the characters “chance up boy passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the advance notice by the chance up character display has been made. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 84 (5f) to (6f), the marker MRK waits at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 84 (7f-1) to (7f-2), the marker MRK starts to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is out of the frame from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (7f-2).

  FIG. 84 (4g ′) shows an example of the performance in the case where, after the performance shown in FIG. 84 (3f) is performed, the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. Has been. Specifically, when the boyi character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (4f), the chance up meter CMT at the first check point CP1 as shown in FIG. 84 (4g ′). In place of the question mark display, an “x” is displayed indicating that the advance notice did not appear. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 84 (4g ″), the question mark display at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 84 (4g ′ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first check point CP1.

  FIG. 84 (2h) is yet another example of production following FIG. 82 (1). The production example shown in FIG. 84 (2h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 84 (2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It is different in point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and the player may have a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice starts.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 84 (5h), a balloon with a letter “chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the advance notice by the chance up character display has been performed. At this time, a part of the characters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice appears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 84 (6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. Appear.
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

  85 (A1) to FIG. 85 (A11) show an example in which the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which a pseudo-run occurs and the number of occurrences of the pseudo-run while performing the pseudo-run effect. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and a state in which a chase effect as an example of a pseudo-continuous effect is started is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 85 (A3), a state in which the chase effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is started where the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a chance up meter CMT having the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 84 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 85 (A3), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are respectively reached on the path of movement of the marker MRK, a pseudo sequence may occur. It is also suggested that reaching the final point captures unscrupulous merchants and makes it easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. This production example is configured so that the larger the pseudo-ream occurs, the easier it is to win a big hit. In addition, when the pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. Note that the jackpot may be determined when the number of pseudo-continuations is other than four. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is one and four, the jackpot may be determined. The number of pseudo-runs that is a big hit is less likely to occur than other pseudo-runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A4), the marker MRK starts to move from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A5), the first decorative symbol is swaying and fluctuating depending on the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. Note that even when the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant, the timing at which “continuation” is displayed is the same as the timing at which the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of “continuation”. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the “continue” character after the character “continue” is displayed together with the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant, After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continue”, the character “continue” may be displayed together with the display in which the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A7) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A7) shows that the distance between the protagonist and the unscrupulous merchant is decreasing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A8), the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A9) shows that the first decorative symbol fluctuates and fluctuates depending on the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle that shows how the main character is chasing the unscrupulous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the unscrupulous merchant that has been available up until now has become an impatient expression.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A10), a character “continue” is displayed together with a display in which the main character chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream is performed. It is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character “Secure” is displayed and a state in which the protagonist is trapped an unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the pseudo-ream is performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time because the marker MRK has reached the final point. At this time, in the first decorative symbol, the “decoration 7” is reached and the reach effect is started.

  85 (B1) to FIG. 85 (B14) show an example in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal display of the decorative symbols and the timing at which a chance up notice is generated is shown. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the aspect described above with reference to FIG. 84 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 85 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B3), a state in which the marker MRK starts moving from the start point is shown. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a balloon displaying the “opportunity” character is displayed, and the navigation character YM provides a navigation character notice. In this production example, the announcement by the balloon of the “opportunity” character of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be an advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “Opportunity” to “No”. In response to this, a balloon with the words “chance up not accepted” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to inform that the navigation character YM has announced the chance up. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. This conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is in the first stage of conversation notice. Further, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Also, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, so that the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Although the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. The character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from “No” to “Intense heat”. In this production example, the notice of the navigation character YM with a balloon of “Intense heat” is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice. In addition, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the second decorative symbol. Here, Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to view than when it is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation advance notice, along with the habit character, the habit conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed. Note that the cocoon conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B6), the operation effective period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the candy. In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (B6), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Tono-sama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the heel is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

    Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 85 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation effective period started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Thereafter, when the player depresses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B9), in the frog conversation image CI2, as shown in FIG. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Furthermore, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the strawberry conversation image CI2 is a display mode that is highlighted with a golden thick line, and it is easier to hit a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the spider conversation image CI2 in gold. , It is informed that a chance up notice has been made in the conversation notice. The marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may proceed without waiting. In addition, when there is no operation of the production button 136 within the operation effective period, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not notify that the chance up notice has been generated, may notify, or may notify only a part thereof. (For example, only the characters “UP” are displayed).

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 85 (B11), a state in which the position of the balloon is changed is shown. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps with the conversation image CI2 of the bag, and the conversation image CI2 of the bag is more difficult to view than when the balloon does not overlap. The position of the balloon may not be changed from the position shown in FIG. 85 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 85 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. Thereby, a history of occurrence of a chance-up notice is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The balloon display may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B13), the first decorative symbol “decoration 7” is in a reach state. At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point and the production by the chance up meter CMT has been completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. Note that the timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance The reach effect may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

The production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is finished when the reach state is reached, but the production may continue even if the reach state is reached, or it will continue even if the transition is made to super reach. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display ends. At this time, for example, when super reach is started, an effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT being continuously executed may be started. Further, the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT may be always started during normal symbol variation display, or may not be started. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started or not started. However, in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always be started. In addition, when it becomes possible to produce an effect using the chance up meter CMT, when the production button 136 is operated, the production using the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to allow the player to recognize.
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  In FIG. 86, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  86 (A1) to FIG. 86 (A5) show that the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but is erased in the middle.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A1) shows a situation where a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is being developed as super reach (swordsman reach). Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way, a specific notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first one. Although the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased because the corresponding chance up notice has not occurred. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (A1), a state is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A2), a cut-in display showing that the character of the frog having the energy drink crawls “Fight” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super-reach that is being executed. When this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in display may be a premier notice, and if it is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. When the cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, a state in which the production by the chance up meter CMT has been finished is shown because the announcement that is likely to be a big hit is performed rather than the chance up notification related to the chance up meter CMT. Yes. The cut-in display is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, it can be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the check point. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily terminated in the middle, or the chance up meter CMT may be terminated in the middle or may not be terminated. At this time, for example, depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or not, the content of the effect performed thereafter may be different, or the same content effect may be performed. . Further, the chance that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle when a chance up notice is generated at all of the checkpoints. It may be. Alternatively, the chance that the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case that the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of “one blow”, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 86 (A4). It is informed that the combination of jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained. In the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 86 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. Is done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, showing that the hero's lord has subjugated the enemy swordsman, and is informed that it will be a big hit. .

  FIG. 86 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 86 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A2a), a cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the effect of other contents is performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in display is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The cut-in display is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, this production example also shows that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. Note that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A2a), the variation icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 86 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each of them is red. And “UP” are displayed. That is, in reality, the chance up notice corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the chance up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not made, but both are expressed as having been done, and the jackpot It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 86 (A3a′-1) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 86 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A3a′-1) shows a state where the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 83 (30b). SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A3a′-1), an opportunity to show the child panda cheering team KPD cheering at the timing when the Sabohan character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. An advance notice is displayed, notifying that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach is greatly increased. In addition, the child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. In FIG. 86 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again. The display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is deleted.

  FIG. 86 (A3a′-2) is an example of an effect following FIG. 86 (A2a), and shows an example of an effect different from FIG. 86 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 86 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 86 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the princess character's cut-in is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83 (30b) and described above, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the co-panda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that has passed through the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that a chance up notice is being made. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be positioned at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

  FIG. 86 (A3a ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 86 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A3a ″) shows a state in which full rotation reach is started. The full rotation reach is a reach where the big hit is fixed, and it is not necessary to give the player more expectation, so the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 86 (A3a ″ ″) ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that the big hit is confirmed at the time when the full rotation reach is started, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth checkpoint CP5. The placard may be displayed with “V” indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or after the full rotation reach has started, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach has started. Then, the full-reach reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT displays again.

  86 (A2b) to FIG. 86 (A3b) show another effect example following FIG. 86 (A1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A2b) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. Thereafter, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior part 224Gd are operated and the effect of overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 (B1) to (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT is started. However, since the result of the loss is displayed on the way, the production by the chance up meter CMT is finished. It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of reach production, and the Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first one. Since the first checkpoint CP1 has been reached, but a chance up notice corresponding thereto has not occurred, the first checkpoint CP1 is not marked with red markings and “UP”. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 86 (B1), a state is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first check point CP1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, and a state of notifying that there is a high possibility of being lost is shown. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B3), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, thereby notifying that the player has lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a display is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (B3 ′), despite the fact that “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that the game will be lost, the chance-up meter CMT displays the SBBO character SBH as the final character. A state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (B4), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is changed by the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  In FIG. 87, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  87 (A1) to FIG. 87 (A5) show that the chance up meter CMT is once erased in the middle of the production by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 87 (A1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Sabohani character SBH is shown starting to move from start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 87 (A2) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of a chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make it easier to see the pattern on the light guide plate IL. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A3) shows a state in which the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by the dark display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the letters “chance up illuminating light emission” in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance up notice has been made. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

  FIG. 87 (A4) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the duel animation display is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown.

  FIG. 87 (A5) shows a state where the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene has been completed. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving.

  In this production example, the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance increase in the reach production. However, the production is not limited to the above, but, for example, the Sabohani character SBH is at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and hits whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the effect of whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to an effect that tells whether it is a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) May be. Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  87 (B1) to FIG. 87 (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the player's operation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 87 (B1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the Boyi character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and a notice of a chance up notice is being made. Further, in this effect example, guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, icons indicating the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 and characters “meter not displayed by arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, when the swordsman reach is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed. However, after the swordsman reach is started, it may be displayed by a display operation by the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B2), a balloon with a “chance up boy passing” character is displayed near the savohani character SBH, and a notice is given by the chance up character display. Is informed.

  When the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 87 (B4). . Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 87 (B6). At this time, the Sabohani character SBH is a position that should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the speech balloon shown in FIG. 87 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from where it is clear. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 (B6 ′), when the presentation between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be positioned in front of the second check point CP2 and wait at that position until the timing for the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 87 (B6) and FIG. 87 (B6 ′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red by the appearance of the boyi character BOY. Characters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (B6), the character “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to view.

  87 (B1) to 87 (B6), the chance up meter CMT can be switched between display and non-display any number of times according to the player's operation. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next presentation by the chance up meter CMT.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. You may be comprised so that it may be in the state performed.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step. FIG. 88 shows an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

  In FIG. 88, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 88A1 to 88A2 show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88A1, an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this effect example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is called a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is called a second chance up meter CMTb. These chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 84 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 88 (A1), the first check points CP1a and CP1b, the second check points CP2a and CP2b, and the third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first check point CP1a (CP1b) to third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks so as to give a sense of expectation that a chance up notice will be given. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeted for the same chance up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed. However, only one chance up meter may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed rather than only one chance up meter. When displayed, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of making a big hit may be the same. In addition, when the production by the chance up meter is performed, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are made the same, but may be different, for example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (A2), when the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first check points CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, “ A balloon with the words “chance up BOY passed” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb to notify that a chance up notice has been made by character display.

    Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (A2 ′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the characters “chance up BOY passed” are displayed in a balloon, and the reliability in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (A2 ″), the first chance is displayed when the boy character BOY is singing a nose as a rare notice as the boy character BOY appears. The letters “Chance Up BOY Passed” are displayed on the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the letters “Chance Up Rhythm” are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb to indicate that a rare notice has occurred. Also good.

  In this production example, the traveling speed of the markers MRKa and MRKb is the same in the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may travel at different speeds. Further, in this effect example, the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

  FIG. 88 (A2a-1) to FIG. 88 (A2a-2) show another example of effects following FIG. 88 (A1). 88 (A2a-1) following FIG. 88 (A1), the marker MRKa, MRKb reaches the first chance up meter CMTa, CMTb and the boy character BOY has appeared. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is deleted from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is deleted. Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, one of them may be deleted. For example, when one of two chance up meters is deleted, it is not deleted. It may be more likely to be a big hit or may be more likely to be a big hit if not erased. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Further, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  FIG. 88 (A2b-1) to FIG. 88 (A2b-2) show another example of the effect following FIG. 88 (A1). 88 (A2b-1) following FIG. 88 (A1), the marker MRKa, MRKb reaches the first chance up meter CMTa, CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words “chance up boy passing” added in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It was informed that this was done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is a higher-reliability notice display. It can be called an aspect. Note that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed only in one of the two chance up meters, or both may be performed.

    Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a low-reliability balloon from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb in which only the erasure is erased and the balloon with high reliability is displayed is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Further, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 88 (B1) to FIG. 88 (B2) shows how two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, and third check point CP3a). Has been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoint. The timing of the advance notice and start of the chance up corresponding to any of CP1a to third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a are in this order.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b and that the boyie character BOY has started nasal singing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the letters “chance up nose singing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb to notify that the chance up notice has been made.

  In this example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is displayed. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint in a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that is not notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even a checkpoint that is notified. Good.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 88 (C1) to (C4) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance up notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been. The development point CPA indicates a point where the reach production may develop. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the period from the start point to the check point in the second chance up meter CMTb, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point is shown. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to a display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this effect example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 84 (2f). The display mode is set, and the second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that described above with reference to FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are the starting points.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C2), a state where a button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased, and a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is shown. Further, on the first chance up meter CMTa, a character “UP” indicating that a chance up notice has occurred at the first check point CP1 is displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a certain chance up notice that appears as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , The cut-in display showing that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. Note that when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTa may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C4), a state where a panda cut-in image is displayed and transition to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check It is shown that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  89 (A1) to FIG. 89 (A7) show a state in which the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of the occurrence of the pseudo-run and the number of occurrences of the pseudo-run during execution of the pseudo-run effect. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed to show that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (A2), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol fluctuates and fluctuates depending on the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. A chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged on the chance up meter CMT. It has been reported that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream may occur at each check point. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continue” is displayed together with the display in which the main character follows the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. Is shown. At this time, on the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters “continue”. At this time, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (A4) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second decorative symbol variation display) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant has missed it, it is shown that it has been developed into a reach by returning the thousand boxes. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 has changed from the question mark to the reach state. The display is switched. As a result, the pseudo-continuous production is ended halfway, and as shown in FIG. 89 (A6), the pseudo-continuous production display fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

    Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the change icon h0. As a result, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the pseudo-continuous effect display. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit may vary depending on the checkpoints reached.

  In addition, as an example of the effect of not displaying the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIG. 89 (A6a-1) to FIG. 89 (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 89 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is ended in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 89 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by a frame-out outside the display screen.

  89 (B1) to FIG. 89 (B7) show a state in which the chance up meter CMT produces an effect during the period from the start of the reach production to the development of super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (B1), a state is shown in which a reach effect that has been reached and shifted to “decoration 7” is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed, while the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In this effect example, when the reach effect starts, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The production using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift is made to the super reach or the losing is displayed without moving to the super reach. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 89 (B1), in the reach effect, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a chance up notice corresponding to each check point is given. "UP" is displayed to that effect. Moreover, the chance up meter CMT overlaps with a part of 1st decoration design.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively. In the first UI unit 280, the change icon h0 is left below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out while being out of frame. In addition, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. Furthermore, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior object 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to advance while the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operating, but the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board. While the behavioral accessory 224Gd is operating, the progress of the marker MRK may be stopped. Further, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd are operating. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 89 (B3), a balloon with the word “chance up big board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first big board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board acting part. The fact that the advance notice of the chance increase by the object 224Gd has been made is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 89 (B6), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position. In the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the final point at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. However, after the marker MRK has reached the final point, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol is left. Although the design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, the first decorative design is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT before the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior 224Gd are operated. After the 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board acting 224Gd are operated, the first decorative design is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative design is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may make it do. In addition, before and after the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, the front and back relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd return to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (B7), it develops into super reach.
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of effects using a chance up meter.

  90 (A1) to FIG. 90 (A5) show an example of the effect shown in FIG. 90A. Other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap the chance up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or other effects may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (A1) shows a state where a battle scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is being developed as a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 90 (A1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is traveling from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the treasure chest BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice effect that is not related to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure chest BX and continues to proceed.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding chance up notice is generated, and the second check point CP2 notifies “UP” "Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (A4), the treasure chest BX is opened, and the appearance of the characters “Intense heat” appears from the inside. The character display of “Intense heat” is also a notice effect unrelated to the chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a chance up notice corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (A5), the treasure box BX that is displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

  FIG. 90 (B1) shows a state in which other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance up meter CMT during the performance using the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (B1), during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous effects are performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous performance is the same type of pachinko machine 100 attached to the same game island using, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a timekeeping means. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when it ends. The wipe screen WP may also be displayed when an effect other than a simultaneous effect is performed.

  90 (C1) to 90 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the performance using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 90 (C1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90C1, the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 90 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (C1), a state in which the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2 is shown.

  Thereafter, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output by a radio device such as a transceiver. When detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 90 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters “Radio wave detected” indicating that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a doffing error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1), etc., and can be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened. Further, depending on the type of error, error display may not be performed, and error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  90 (C2a), (C2b), and (C2c) show other display examples of error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 90 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. You may make it display so that it may overlap with at least one part. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 90 (C2b) is configured so that a plurality of error displays can be performed simultaneously, and when an error occurs, the display is displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 90 (C2c), a state in which error display is performed on the entire display screen is shown. Specifically, it is detected by a magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100, for example, that a strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (C2c), an error display is displayed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters “magnetic detected” indicating that fact. Thereby, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and other effects are also not displayed. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is turned off, for example, not making a big hit determination. . If the power is shut off while the error is displayed and then the power supply is restored, the symbol variation stop command is issued after the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen.

  90D1 to FIG. 90D2 illustrate how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. 90 (D1) to FIG. 90 (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is replaced by the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest actor 224E. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (D1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. In addition, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (D1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach production progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 90 (D1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and at the first checkpoint CP1, a character “UP” is displayed to notify that. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 90 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is traveling from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. In the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs swordsman” indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed, and a change icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  90D2 shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than when the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. Further, in the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character is displayed with a balloon with the word “game” displayed.

  In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display unit. However, the chance up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display unit. For example, display means constituted by a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like is applicable.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 90 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. It may be. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this production example, the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described. can do.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining a change mode of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

    In FIG. 91, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  91 (A1) to FIG. 91 (A9) show an example of the change in the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change rate of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement. Is shown differently.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 91 (A3) shows that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect is being performed by the navigation character YM. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 that simulates the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 that indicates the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where you can. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 91 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the spider, and the conversation of Tono-sama is more than that in the state of not being overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. Further, part of the habit conversation image CI2 is overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period in the conversation notice starts at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A5). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A5). The operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, and is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91 (A5) to FIG. 91 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is slower than the speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A8), as shown in FIG. 91 (A9), in the conversation image CI2 of the kite, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with “Intense heat. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed is changed to the character display of “Intense heat”, so that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, a state in which an effect corresponding to the button operation result is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM by one operation of the effect button is shown. ing. It should be noted that the character display of “It is intense heat” displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the bag and the character display of “Intense heat” displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started first. An effect according to the result may be performed. That is, in this effect example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation notice, the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM is shown in FIG. 91 (A9a-1). Only in accordance with the operation (character display of “Intense heat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed in the conversation image CI2) (Indication of “It ’s intense heat”) is not performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (A9a-2), when the player operates the second effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 81 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. In other words, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect based on the conversation notice (character display of “It is intense heat” in the conversation image CI2 of the bag) is performed.

  In addition, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the effect is given with priority to the button effect with a high gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. An effect according to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 is performed with priority given to a button effect with a small gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. Also good.

  Further, in this effect example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different, but for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the heel notice image CI2 until a certain time. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when it reaches a certain time. .

  Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is 5 seconds. For example, the remaining time display meter is prepared at a speed corresponding to each of 5 seconds and 10 seconds. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change rate of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the heel notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Also, in this effect example, “Intense fever” is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that has started to be extended later than when “Intense heat” is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier. ”Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is easier to display when the jackpot is displayed, and the notice display displayed later is displayed more easily. The player may be surprised by displaying while the degree of attention is relatively lowered. In addition, “Intense fever” was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the bag that started to be extended later than when “Intense fever” was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect was displayed earlier. In that case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 91 (B1) to (B11) show a state in which both the timer notice production and the production using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon h0 and a chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and a state in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT is shown. A chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 91 (B1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of reach production. The Sabohani character SBH moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress of reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 91 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When reaching the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, it is shown that a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated, which suggests that either the big hit or the loss result is derived when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B2) shows that the savohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer notice effect functions as a chance-up notice. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B4), a balloon with the word “chance up timer notice” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, indicating that the chance up notice has been made. We are reporting. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and “09:17” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (B4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Characters are displayed above it to indicate a history that a notice has occurred. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (B5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B6), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving is shown. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part of the display is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:31” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B7), a state is shown in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second check point CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, a chance up notice (for example, occurrence of cut-in) is made, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. In addition, the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the advance notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “04:14” is indicated at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B8), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 is shown. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (B9), in the timer notice display TM1, the characters “attention” for prompting attention to the notice are displayed instead of the timer display. According to this production example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohan character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the letters “chance up lever” is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH. It is informing that the advance notice has been started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a chance-up notice displayed in response to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice made as a result of completion of the count-down of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. Alternatively, it can also be said that the advance notice of the chance-up performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the advance notice indicated by the characters “attention” shown in the timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that the target of the chance advance notice shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the subject of the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect. For example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va is a chance-up advance notice made when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the point CP3, and the advance notice made as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. (For example, changing from red to gold).

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 on the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing other examples of button effects in stages.

  In FIG. 92, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (2) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion notification images composed of combinations of button images and remaining time display meters are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged on the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. A second operation promotion notification image consisting of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image consisting of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged at the upper right and includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged at the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining image are displayed. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of a time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation prompt composed of a sixth button image 136a6 and a sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (4), all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 show that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreased. Has been. In this production example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation effective period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have the same operation effective period length. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (5), as shown in FIG. 92 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the panda. The state changes to KP and a notice is being shown. Note that the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among a plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion notification are displayed. The display mode is changed one by one in priority in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. Note that the order of the operation promotion notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 once.

  In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes most preferentially when the effect button 136 is operated). It is assumed that the gauge decreases faster than the remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) The remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 is a decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes in the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (4b), a sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification with the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated). The decrease in the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for quickly reducing the gauge is not limited to the above-described meter, and can be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, in this production example, all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are configured with the button images 136a1 to 136a6, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image are used. Any one or more of the operation promotion notification images may be displayed in place of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (4c), the sixth operation promoting notification image is replaced with the sixth button image 136a6 as a sixth operation promoting notification image. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meter of any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same speed at which the gauge decreases, or as shown in FIG. The remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is made to decrease the speed of the gauge faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images. Or you may make it slow. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 92 (4c) is performed, it is promoted that the effect lever 136V is operated once after the effect button 136 is operated five times. You may be able to.

  Further, in this effect example, the remaining time display in the other operation promotion notification image is performed by using the remaining time display meter's gauge decreasing speed in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (4d), there may be two or more ones with different speeds at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (4d), the speeds at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease are the other operation promotion notifications. The remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, and MT6 of the image are different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and correspond to the fifth operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

    FIG. 93 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  93 (A1) to FIG. 93 (A6) show an example in which a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 93 (A1) shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer notice display. Is different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as a first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as a second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2) shows a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 has been completed. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster in countdown than the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the actual passage of time. The countdown speed of the first timer notice display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “06: 00”, that is, the state when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown of the timer notice display is started is shown. Can do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, a character of “attention” for prompting attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A5), the timer display is “05:87”. Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be performed. Note that the second timer notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, going out of the frame after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” and the countdown is completed. Thereafter, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be performed. Thereafter, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, out of the frame.

  In this example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described. However, the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect that has been started first is used. The timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display that is started later.

  93 (B1) to FIG. 93 (B4) show an example in which a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one of the timer notice effects is added. Show.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. FIG. 93 (B1) shows a state in which two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Specifically, the timer notice display is started when the timer notice display (the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2) enters the frame from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display “10:00”, which indicates that a notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the timer display countdown speed in the timer notice display is the same.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B2) shows a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 has been completed. Each timer notice display TM1, TM2 then starts a countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B3), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down as the actual time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 93 (B3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are both “09:73”. Note that the countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B3), a state in which a timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM is shown. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “+10 seconds” indicating the added time in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies the added time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (B4), the timer display in the first timer preview display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer preview display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is 10 seconds. Has occurred. For this reason, two timer notice effects are started, but time is added to one timer display on the way, and therefore the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays. However, the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the timer notice effect. The time until the countdown is completed after the countdown of any one of the timer displays may be temporarily changed.

  Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice that has been started first is used. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the performance and completing the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. The timer display countdown in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later is shortened, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed when two timer notice effects are performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time or pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display It may be changed.

  In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer notice effect are performed, and thereby the timer notice related to the timer notice effect is provided. An addition of time to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after two timer notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed. For example, for one timer notice effect of two timer notice effects The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects, etc. are performed, for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects, or only by one of the three timer addition effects, etc. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

  93 (C1) to FIG. 93 (C4) are examples of effects that prompt the user to operate one of the plurality of operation means. The state of being displayed is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (C1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” indicating that 1 is 1. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (C1), a button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Also, corresponding to the right door image DRR, a right key image 137aR simulating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the right door image DRR, and below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the operation key unit 137.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (C2), the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 respectively corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR start the operation effective period and have a reduced gauge. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation effective period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation effective period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation effective period elapses earlier. It has become. For this reason, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 93 (C3) shows a state in which the left door image DRL is selected by the player operating the left key. Specifically, the left door image DRL moves to the center of the display screen and is enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are deleted. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This notifies that the left door image DRL has been selected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and a state in which the replay symbol RP appears. Thereby, for example, it is foretelling that a pseudo ream will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 93 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 93 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right door image. The DRR door may open and a pine symbol CC may appear. This pine symbol CC has the letter “Gekiatsu” added, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this production example, when one of the two remaining time display meters whose gauge decrease is faster is selected, a warning display with higher reliability is performed. Even if is selected, the same display may be displayed. In addition, when the slower remaining gauge of the two remaining time display meters is selected, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

Also, in this effect example, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation effective period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the system waits until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0 and operates the right key. The operation of the right key may be invalidated during standby.
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 94, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  94 (A1) to FIG. 94 (A12) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed after the timer notice effect is started. . Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer preview display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in size, may be displayed in other sizes, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (A2), “03:01” is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. The symbol display device 208 is changed to substantially the center. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap the timer notice display TM1 by which the 1st decoration symbol was expanded and displayed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is performed. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may be enlarged without changing the size of the timer display portion. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged when the timer display becomes “03:00”. However, the timer notice display TM1 may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A4) to (A7), the count-down in the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 94 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A9), the timer preview display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Note that the timer preview display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (A10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (A12). Thereby, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

  In this effect example, when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating the remaining 3 seconds in the timer notice effect, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened to the timer display, or the timer table may be displayed. Countdown may be stopped, the timer display countdown speed may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewinded), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and renewed. A timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

  In this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size. However, the size may be changed to three or more sizes. When the “notice” character display is displayed in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when the timer display or the “attention” character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. You may make it display by size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

  Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size. However, for example, it may be changed from the small size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “05:00”, the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the medium size, and when it becomes “03:00”, the size changes from the medium size to the large size. You may make it change to size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, it may not change to large size.

  Moreover, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, the size of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the “notice” character display is displayed, The size may be changed to a large size.

  In this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may vary depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of “attention” (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). ). The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display or the “attention” character display in the timer notice display TM1.

  Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo-continuous design is likely to stop. You may do it.

  Also, in this effect example, when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect is likely to be performed when the countdown is completed, and it may be easy to make a big hit.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts. However, at the start of the countdown or when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is good also as a display mode of a large size.

  In this example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, and the timer display is changed. The size of may not be changed. Alternatively, the size of the timer display may be changed to a small size without changing the size of the timer display. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the frame portion or background color of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, but the color of the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame part (and / or the background part) of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, but the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed in form by animation. In this case, for example, when the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, the form of the timer display may be changed by animation. In addition, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by animation, but the timer display may not be changed. In addition, although the form of the timer display changes due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  94 (B1) to FIG. 94 (B4) show another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “00:31” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are in a variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 94 (B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 94 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 displays “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The characters “attention” are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the character display of “attention” may not be performed, and no effects may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. In this way, not only during the timer display countdown, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged when a “notice” character is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  95 (A1) to FIG. 95 (A3) are examples in which the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display form is displayed on another display means when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. Show. 95 (A1) to FIG. 95 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is replaced with the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest character 224E. It is arranged below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A1) shows how the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the second reserved number display, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 95 (A1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the countdown effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2), the decorative symbols are still displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (A3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer preview display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the sub display device 208S after the timer notice display TM1 has completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative design display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or before the timer preview display TM1 extends over the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed.

  95 (B1) to FIG. 95 (B3) show another example in which the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display form is displayed on another display means when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. An example is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This second hold number display indicates that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. 1 "is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09:69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B2), the decorative symbol variation display is still performed. In the timer advance notice TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (B2). At this time, the sub-display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is positioned on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative symbol and timer notice display TM1 and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. The sub display device 208S may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (B3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. Note that when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement by animation and enlarged display may be performed. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, and the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208S, or may be enlarged before the timer preview display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the moving and enlarged display animation is performed. In this production example, when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged, the timer preview display TM1 is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Alternatively, the timer preview display TM1 may be displayed. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with a reduced size. Further, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  95 (C1) to FIG. 95 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the timer notice display TM1 is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 95 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (C3), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change is a mode in which a timer display is arranged inside a circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 95 (C3) to (C6), the display state of the circular meter portion changes in a manner that the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Note that the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, but the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. The timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed. For example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter portion is enlarged. You may make it display. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be constituted by only a circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than when the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Note that the first decorative symbol may overlap the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the change display animation is performed. However, the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is performed. Further, when changing the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the timer display part may not be changed, but only the frame part of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 95 (C4) to (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display in the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 95 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a “continues” indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. "Is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Note that characters other than “continue” may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the system shifts to SP reach, “SP reach” or the like is displayed to display the SP reach. You may alert | report that it transfers. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “attention” may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. The display in which the pseudo-simulated symbols that have been moved moves at a low speed from above to below is started. Thereafter, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous is executed.

  In this example, the “continuation” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. For example, a pseudo-continuous effect is provided by adding a question mark to the “continuation” character. You may display so that there may be no effect. In such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Also, in this effect example, when a timer display targeting the same effect is displayed in a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Also, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer display of “03:00”, and the other timer notice display is displayed in a different display mode, for example, “3 seconds remaining” is roughly displayed. A countdown display may be performed.
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 96, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  96 (A1) to FIG. 96 (A8) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 96 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A2), a state in which a timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon with the characters “addition” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 adds time. It will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer notice effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 96 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the added time is displayed, and the added time is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “05:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 5 seconds, and the display position is also displayed as a decorative symbol. The device 208 is changed to approximately the center. In this example, the countdown is once interrupted when “05:00” is reached, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed when the remaining time of the timer display is the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is displayed by adding the time to the timer display. Is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. You may make it overlap with TM1. In addition, the condition for the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display. For example, when the timer display changes, such as when the timer display is shortened or the countdown is stopped. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (A5), in the enlarged timer preview display TM1, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and a state in which 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display is shown. . While the timer addition effect is being performed, the countdown display may be stopped, or the countdown display may be advanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. The display position is also changed to the original position. Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  96 (B1) to FIG. 96 (B7) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 96 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the first decorative symbol, “decoration 7” is stopped on the left symbol and “decoration 7” is stopped on the right symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and “00:00” is displayed. Yes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the same time, “notice” that prompts attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (B3), when the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol represented by the Tono-like character in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from above to below. This pseudo-continuous effect by the pseudo-continuous design is continuously performed from FIG. 96 (B3) to FIG. 96 (B7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (B4), in the timer preview display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, a count-up animation is displayed, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and the state in which 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1 restarts the countdown of the timer display. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (B7), cut-in display composed of Tono-sama character and “continue” character display is performed, and then the second variation display of decorative symbols is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 96 (B7), the timer display is “14:92”.
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 97, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  97 (A1) to FIG. 97 (A8) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display form of the timer notice display changes to raise the rank of the notice. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in large size, and a state in which it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second reserved number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (A2).

  FIG. 97 (A3) shows a state in which the duel scene animation display continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (A4), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds, and the timer preview display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot is increased. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed in an enlarged manner because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A5), the timer preview display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of “LvUP” is deleted. The timer preview display TM1 may be displayed as it is without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display as shown in FIG. 97 (A7). The word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, the character “Slash Ats” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high is displayed together with the princess character. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A7), in response to the timer notice display TM1 being ranked up, a character display of “expected size” is added. As a result, it is easier to hit a big hit than when a cut-in display without a character display of “expected large” is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of “Long Expectation” may be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, or may not be displayed. In addition, the text display of “expected large” may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this effect example, the character display of “Large Expectation” is easier to display when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when the timer is not ranked up. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A7), the display of the change icon h0 is also changed and the notice display is performed. The change in the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect, or may be made regardless of the timer notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

  As described above, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice made as a result of completion of the countdown by the timer notice effect is promoted, or the timer notice. The rank increase of the display TM1 itself may function as a chance increase notice. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the degree of expectation that the notice with high reliability of the jackpot is displayed in advance has increased.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank advance of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice that is made as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative symbol It may indicate that there is a possibility that the design of reach will be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach effect is performed with “decoration 2” where the probability variation big hit is not fixed, and the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and the big hit is achieved, May be changed to reach of “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 97 (B1) to (B7) show that the production using the chance up meter is started when the timer notice production is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B2), a chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B3), a state in which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the start point SP is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (B3).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boyi character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. The state of doing is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of the Boyi character BOY. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (B4), when the boyi character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size so that the boyi character BOY is conspicuous. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to obstruct the display of the boyfriend character BOY. It can be easily recognized. Note that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even if it is reduced, and “15:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (B4). Note that the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 97 (B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of the chance increase by the boy character BOY is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance increase by the boyi character BOY ends, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to notify that the advance notice of the chance increase is being performed. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer advance notice TM1, the enlarged display of the timer advance notice TM1, the change in the frame of the timer advance notice TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer advance notice TM1, the timer advance notice The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 98, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 98 (A1) to (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A1) shows a state of transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes its display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (A3 ′), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to make the effect of super reach stand out.

  In this example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts. However, when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 98 (A1) is performed. Alternatively, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed when the super reach title shown in FIG. 98 (A2) is displayed. Also good. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 has a chance to increase), It may be displayed as it is. Also, when the timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, the timing of 3 seconds ago or 0, the chance of the timer preview display TM1 being increased, etc.). Or a larger display than the size initially displayed).

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 98 (B1) to (B7) show how the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the production movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B1) shows a state of transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “27:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  FIG. 98 (B2) shows a state in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partly overlapped by the second large board behavioral object 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the case where it is not overlapped. TM1 is considered difficult to see.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center portion on the right end of the display screen is changed to the center upper end portion of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd do not operate | move, although a display position does not need to be changed, a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer preview display TM1, but the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is not changed. Note that the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (B6), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the center portion on the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B7). Note that the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd start returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first board action 224Ga to the fourth board action 224Gd start returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1. After starting movement to the original position, the operation of returning the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd to the initial position may be started.

  98 (C1) to FIG. 98 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (C1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in FIG. “1” is displayed indicating that A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “29:69” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C2), the state where “decoration 7” is stopped and reached in the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, and the variation icon h0 is displayed. The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are out of the frame and are not displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative design, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right design of the first decorative design. Note that the timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C4), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (C5), a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 99, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 99A1 to A10, the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and in the second hold number display, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed. Yes. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A1) shows a state of transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “21:37” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in large size is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A3), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A3). In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is displayed in which a character “shrink timer” is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137. It is informed that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started. However, the guide display may be displayed from the start of the timer notice production, or the reach state is reached. May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A4), as shown in FIG. 99 (A5), the timer preview display TM1 is reduced and displayed. change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A5). In the guide display shown in FIG. 99 (A5), the characters “expand timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer notice display TM1 is expanded by the player operating the upper key. Then, it is displayed that the original size is displayed, and that the display position returns to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 99 (A7). The display position returns to the original position. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “17:81” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A7). In addition, in the guide display shown in FIG. 99 (A7), a guide display is displayed in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer preview display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 99 (A3), when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated when the timer preview display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A8), the animation display of the duel scene is being continued. In the timer advance notice TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (A8).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (A9), when the timer display becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining 3 seconds, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. This indicates that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. Note that the display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes “03:00” and is displayed in a reduced size, the display returns to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display position may remain at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A10), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  99 (B1) to FIG. 99 (B9) show how the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in large size is displayed, and the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B1), the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second reserved number display. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “20:35” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B2), the display of an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman who is the enemy of the main character is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (B2).

  FIG. 99 (B3) shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (B4), the effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing “15:00” indicating that the timer display is the remaining 15 seconds, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer indications in the timer notice indications TM1L and TM1R indicate the same time, respectively, and “13:56” is indicated in the timing shown in FIG. 99 (B5). In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame may not be changed, and when the color of the frame is changed to red, You may make it easier to hit big hits than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may change to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (B6), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 99 (B7), in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R, the timer display Instead, the word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is scolding “I will rewrite the reach” is shown. Yes. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the timer display countdown in one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed. This is to inform you that you will be promoted to a higher reach production. In addition, the effect performed when the countdown of the timer display in both timer preview displays of the two timer preview displays TM1L and TM1R is completed may be used.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B9) shows a state where the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach where the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 99 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the predecessor swordsman reach in that the protagonist and the enemy swordsman confront each other. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (B9), a notice display indicating that the co-panda cheering team KPD composed of three co-panda characters is cheering is performed. It is informing that the reliability for the big hit has increased dramatically. The co-panda support group KPD is a notice character displayed when the timer display countdown in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

In this production example, a chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is produced corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that a chance-up production is being performed in the developed reach production.
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 100, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 100 (A1) to (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 100A1 to A5, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also configured to be visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest role 224E and the Senryo box role 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 100 (A1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the main character and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. . Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 100 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 in the second hold number display. “1” is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer notice effect is performed, “15:47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A2), the duel scene animation is continuously performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “15:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A2).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “14:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are reciprocated left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, a state in which the timer notice display is divided into two is shown. Note that the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each show the same time. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A4), “13: 56 ". Note that the timer display countdown continues while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. The timer display countdown may be interrupted. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number divided by the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more, and the greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, the timer display may be performed not only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M but also on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display continues to count down, and “12:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A5).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 100 (B1) to (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 100 (B1) to (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-view state and a difficult-to-view state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B1), it is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and a state in which a duel scene animation between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is performed is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the second number of holds display indicates that the number of holds in FIG. 1 "is displayed. A variation icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, “18:19” is displayed, and the timer display is counted down. In addition, the timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, “6:19” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes “0” in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the timer display is “0” in the timer display effect in the mini display device 208P, the effect such as the chance increase notification may be performed. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (B2), at the timing when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes “15:00” indicating that the remaining 15 seconds, the timer notice display is displayed. An effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing “3:00” indicating that the timer display remains for 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the timer display time displayed on the mini display device 208P. The characters “UP” indicating that the timer display of TM1 is added are displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (B4), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer display for 3 seconds and updated to “18:00”.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (B5), the timer display countdown is resumed in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (B5), the timer display is “17:99”. On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen due to the shutter member. In this example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added to the timer, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM in the device 208, the timer display in the mini display device 208P may not be ended, and thereafter the timer display may be counted down.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  101 (A1) to FIG. 101 (A10) show an example of notification by displaying that the timer notice effect is being prepared before the timer notice effect is started. Show. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A2), the timer notice preparation effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. The timer notice preparation effect is an indication that preparation is in progress until the timer notice effect starts, so that the player has a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, “STANDBY” to be described later may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A3), a state in which the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed is shown. When the timer preview display TM1 is completed, the timer preview display TM1 displays “STANDBY” indicating that the timer preview display is being prepared, thereby notifying that effect. In other words, in this effect example, the effect is performed as one aspect of the pre-reading notice that notifies that the timer notice effect is to be performed within the hold. In addition, the change notice for notifying that the timer notice effect is performed in the changing symbol display may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and has a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position may be reduced after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, or the display position may be changed after the reduction display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 need not be reduced and the display position need not be changed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A5) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A6), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. Thus, it can be said that the timer notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A7) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters “STANDBY” are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A8), the decorative symbol variable display is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer preview display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display section. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A9), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position. From the display of “STANDBY”, the timer display is displayed. The state of switching to the display of “10:00” is shown. This notifies that the timer notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer preview display TM1 moves while being enlarged may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be enlarged after being changed, or the display position may be changed after being enlarged. Further, the display position of the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer preview display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed. May be switched to a timer display. The timing at which the display of the timer preview display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer preview display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A10), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may make it change from small size to large size.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 101B1 to B8, a plurality of clock notice icons MI1 functioning as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer notice effects are performed as many times as the number of watch notice icons MI1 stocked. Shows about. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. “3” indicating that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 3 is displayed. A change icon h0 and a navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B2), a state where “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This “decoration 3” is added with a watch notice icon MI1 and indicates that one watch notice icon MI1 is stocked. Note that two or more clock notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B3), a state is shown in which the display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1”. Also, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of watch notice icons MI1 stocked is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the watch notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the watch notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B4) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is also performed is shown. The navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon displaying a “get” character together with a clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this example of the function functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect will be performed within the hold. In this way, the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one and may be two or more. There may also be a plurality of types of effects that are performed when the watch warning icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of clock notice icons MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B5), a state in which the display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is shown. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock × 3” indicating that the notice icons MI1 of three clocks are stocked is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B6) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B7), one of the three stock clock notice icons MI1 is consumed, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In this example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. However, two timer notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested and one timer notice effect is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (B7 ′), a watch notice icon MI1 is displayed. The timer notice effect may be started without digesting.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the timer notice icon TM1 may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end of the display screen from the beginning. .
In the above description,

“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]

  One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 75 (1)],

  The first display is a certain effect [e.g., a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 73 (11) to (12) or a notice display by a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 74 (a5), 74 (c2), lever effect shown in FIG. 74 (9fa ′), a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol shown in a stop display, etc., a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 208S, and a first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect display using the mini display device 208P] is a display for informing the timing.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 75 (2) to (5)],

  The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 75 (2) to (5). “Increase” and “+10 seconds” displayed in the balloon of the character YM]

The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (2) to (5), a timer notice effect is performed in the timer notice display TM1. Etc., when a timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is informed by the first display, it is informed that the time informed by the second display will change. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain stage to start, there is an expectation that the time may change, and enjoy the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when the certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may necessarily notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  Further, the second display may be for notifying only that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or notifying that the timing at which a certain effect is started is not changed. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change, or may not notify that the timing at which a certain effect starts will change. It may be a thing.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

  The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). The countdown display countdown may be started. The end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). Display state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and display displayed on the first display after countdown is completed (For example, the character display of “attention”) may be hidden.

In addition, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (2) to (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time in the timer display is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where attention can be paid to a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, after the second display is displayed, only the display mode of the first display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of other displays may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not change.

  Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may be changed, and the display mode of the first display is changed only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

  In addition, “the display unit is a unit configured by a plurality of display units, and one of the plurality of display units is a first display unit [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means also displays the second display. In some cases, attention can be focused on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight only on the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be constituted only by the first display means and the second display means, or may be constituted by including display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . The display means may be configured to include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed only on the first display unit, or may be displayed other than the first display unit. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the first display unit.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on a screen other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display unit without fail, or may not be displayed on the second display unit.

  In addition, “the second display unit is disposed on the front side of the first display unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 79A1, the sub display unit 208S is closer to the decorative symbol display unit 208. Etc.],

The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 79A2 to 79A3] The decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it can be made easier to recognize that there is a possibility that the time until the change will occur.

  Here, only the first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displaying the second display. Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped by the display means. Further, the first display means may be necessarily overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed. One display means may not overlap.

    Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed. The first display means may be overlapped by display means other than the means.

  In addition, the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 79 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 79 (B3) are used as the decorative symbol display device. 208, the second display means is configured to be movable between positions substantially overlapping the front side of 208 and the like,

The second display means is display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative design display device 208, etc. at a position overlapping the front surface of approximately the center of 208]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be configured to be movable. In addition, the second display unit may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display unit may be disposed between the first position and the second position. You may be comprised so that it may not move.

  In addition, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be provided in addition to between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may be overlapped with the first display means at a position other than the second position. It may be anything. In addition, the second display means may necessarily overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Also good.

  Further, the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to (7)]

The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain performance is performed is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to (7), the timer notice display TM1 The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may include only a countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed by counting down timings other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed, or may not be performed by counting down until a certain effect is performed. Good.

In addition, the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued without fail, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. Also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in a state other than the state where the second display is displayed. Also good.

Further, during the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the second display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 73 (8), etc.]
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.

When the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. When the display becomes 0, the word “attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail. When the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display is not the case where the first display is a display indicating 0. Three displays may be displayed.

  In addition, the game stand characterized in that, in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the second display is not displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation due to the display of the second display.

  When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. There may be.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, pseudo continuous effects shown in FIGS. 73 (9) to (12)], and the certain effects are It is an effect including the fourth display, and the fourth display is an effect display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

  In addition, a production moving means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest member 224E, a Thousand box accessory 224H, a first large board behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [for example, a first operation shown in FIG. 74 (d3), 1 large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd, etc.], the certain stage is a stage including the first action, and the first stage is a stage action. A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. In addition, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. Further, the effect moving means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Also, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

  In addition, when the certain effect is performed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 73 (11) to FIG. The game stand characterized by the fact that the case where the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-ream is not started. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a sense of expectation can be given to a certain performance.

  When a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a final state. Even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed. Also good.

  “One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) or FIGS. 73 (9) to (12). And the second display is started after the first display is started. FIG. 82 (4) and FIG. In the period until the display, the fifth display may start to be displayed, the fifth display is a notice display, and the fifth display is displayed when the fifth display is displayed. The jackpot symbol is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the display is not displayed. [For example, the conversation notice is performed when the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) is performed. Etc.], which is more likely to be a big hit than if there is not. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a sense of expectation that the fifth display is displayed in the period from when the first display starts to display until the second display starts. is there.

  Here, only the fifth display may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. In the period from when the display is started until the second display is started, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

  In addition, the fifth display may be displayed only during the period from when the first display is started until the second display is started, or the first display is displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started even in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finalized without fail, or when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finalized. There may be.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained. In addition, the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  In the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third A game machine equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, the chance shown in FIG. 86 (A1)] The display of the up meter CMT, etc.], and the period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 82, The chance up meter CMT may be displayed during the period when the swordsman reach is performed, etc.], and one of the plural types of displays is the first It is an output display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 82 (18)], and the period display has a first timing [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 82 (18) is started. The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start, and the display of the period display. The display may be erased before the first timing from the start of display [for example, as indicated by checkpoint CP3 as shown in FIGS. 86A1 to 86A2. If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 86 (A2) is performed before the timing, the chance up meter CMT is erased]. Was explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, so there is a possibility that the display means may not be seen until the first timing is close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing. Even when the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to see the period display. There is a case.

    Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game during the period from when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. In addition, a plurality of types of displays may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the period display and the first effect display. The display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be one that may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the period display starts, or before the first timing after the period display starts. The display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

  Note that the display period of the period display may be during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, etc., regardless of the reach.

  Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed for long reach but may be displayed for SP reach. Further, it may be displayed not in the first half of SP reach but in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the second half of the SP reach.

  Also, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. In addition, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. The start of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progression by the character or marker in the chance up meter is completed. There may be. In addition, when the operation means is configured to be able to display / hide the chance up meter, the start of the period display is the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  Also, the start of the period display refers to the period display effect until the period display effect ends (for example, the chance up meter) (for example, the chance up meter is displayed indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed). Or until the display suggesting that it can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden.

  The period display includes not only the display until the first timing is reached, but also the display that is erased before the first timing is reached.

  Further, there may be two or more certain periods during the period in which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, when the second certain period starts while the period display itself continues to be displayed, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in of cocoon shown in FIG. 86 (A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 86 (A2b), etc.]] The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display, and the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, FIG. 86 (A1) to FIG. 86 (A2b) and FIG. 86 (A2b), in the performance by the chance up meter CMT, before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, it is shown in FIG. 86 (A2). The cut-in display of the eyelids shown or the effect image shown in FIG. 86 (A2b) may be displayed, etc.], and the period display notifies the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the cut-in display of the eyelid shown in FIG. 86 (A2) is displayed. The timing and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 86 (A2b) are not notified, etc.]

  During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A1) to FIG. 86 (A2) and FIG. 86 (A2b), as shown in FIG. 86 (A2). A game stand characterized by the fact that the chance-up meter CMT is erased when the cut-in display of the bag or the effect image shown in FIG. 86 (A2b) is displayed]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes There are cases where you can also have expectations.

  Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or the second effect display is displayed in addition to before the first timing. There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. May be. The period display may not necessarily notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Further, only the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display, and displays other than the period display may be erased during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may be necessarily deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

  Further, the period display may be deleted only during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may be deleted in addition to the display of the second effect display.

  Instead of the effect display, notifications other than errors, such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing a prepaid card from being forgotten to be removed, may be used. In addition, the display of the effect display may be a display that appears by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect moving means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

  Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 2nd production display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

  In addition, the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the eyelid shown in FIG. 86 (A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 86 (A2b)]. A game table characterized by being. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. There may be a case where the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

  In addition, the game stand characterized in that, in the event that the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the second effect display is not displayed. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed, or even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done. In addition, a production moving means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, family crest role 224E, thousand-thousand box role 224H, first large board behavior role 224Ga to fourth big board behavior role 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [for example, a second operation shown in FIG. 86 (A3b), 1 large board act 224Ga to 4th board act 224Gd, etc.], the second action is a stage action, and the second stage display [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 86 (A2b)] The game machine may be characterized in that the second operation may be performed during display of an image display or the like. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, a dynamic effect using the effect moving means is possible, and the effect can be further improved.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect moving means may necessarily execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be necessarily performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

  “One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest member 224E shown in FIGS. 15E1 to E2 and the operation shown in FIG. 15F1. A game stand characterized by the operation of a thousand carton box 224H. ”Was also explained.

In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A2a) to (A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where expectation can be given for the redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display is also displayed again. It may be configured. The period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

  The period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again other than after the period display is erased. Also good.

  Further, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 86A2 to 86A5]. In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the samurai character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or until a certain period elapses after the period display is erased. A display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period display is not performed until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, only after the period display is erased, the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

  If there are a plurality of periods in the period during which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period after the first certain period is started. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

  In addition, “the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the certain period is a period during execution of super reach. ”Was also explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [e.g., a champ-up notice by displaying a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 82 (4), and a lord shown in FIG. 82 (13). The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display, and the period display is a second timing [for example, 82 (4), the timing indicated by the check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ-up by the display of the boyfriend character BOY is started, and the advance notice of the chance by the display of the Tono-like cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 82 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2 at which is started, etc.] may also be notified, and the second timing is the It is the timing when the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timing than the second timing. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

In addition, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be the one in which the display of the third effect display is not started.
The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

  In addition, it is possible to fix the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to reach, such that the effect display is always performed three times when a certain reach occurs and the effect display is always performed twice when another reach occurs. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed such that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once in some cases. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, and conversely, it may be easily shifted. Also, the likelihood of winning a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win.

  Also, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing The two timings may be the same timing.

  Further, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 82 (18), etc.],

A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained. In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “one type of the plurality of types of display is the third display, and“ when at least a part of the first display is difficult to visually recognize ”means“ the third display The game table is characterized in that “at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the above”. ”Was also explained.

  Further, the “display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means, the display means is a first display means, and the first display means may display the period display. The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and that the second display means may overlap at least part of the period display. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be constituted by only a plurality of display means, or may be constituted by other than the plurality of display means. In addition, the display means may be necessarily constituted by a plurality of display means, or may not be constituted by a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other displays than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

  In addition, the second display unit may perform only the production operation, or may perform an operation other than the production operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the production operation or may not perform the production operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or a case where the second display means overlaps other than at least a part of the period display. There may be. In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is necessarily overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. Also good.

  In the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third A game machine equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], wherein one of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, FIG. 91 (A1) to FIG. One of the plural types of displays is a second display [for example, conversation shown in FIG. 91 (A4) to FIG. 91 (A9)]. The display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag in the advance notice], the first display and the second display are different displays, and at least a display mode of the first display [for example, FIG. (A1 The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. At least a part of the display mode [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the bag conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 91 (A4)] is the second speed [for example, the rate at which the gauge disappears in 5 seconds, etc.] ] May change,

  The gaming table, wherein the first speed and the second speed are different speeds. Was explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, a large number of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with a game or a player who plays a game for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming machine, the first speed and the second speed are made different to cause the player to naturally guide his / her line of sight to a display with a fast (slow) speed at which the display mode changes. May also be able to entertain the production.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be in some of the periods in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the period. In addition, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period among the periods in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be erased before the first timing after the period display starts, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before, the period display may not be erased.

  Further, the period display may be erased only before the display of the period display starts before the first timing, or the first timing after the display of the period display starts. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

  Further, the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 91 (A1)], and the second display is the time display [ For example, a display including a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 91 (A4)], and the time display is displayed according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, an operation effective period, etc.]. [For example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 91 (A1) and the remaining time meter MT2 shown in FIG. 91 (A4) are gauged according to the time from when the operation effective period starts. Etc.], a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the display mode change speed can be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. The first display may necessarily include a time display or may not include a time display.

  Further, the second display may include only a time display, or may include a display other than the time display. The second display may necessarily include a time display, or may not include a time display.

  Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes depending on other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. The time display may be such that the display mode always changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

  In addition, “both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 91A4 to A7, a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both an effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and an operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the bag in the conversation preview are displayed]. I also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the production can be lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or there may be a display other than both the first display and the second display. Also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of“ hot heat ”in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (A9)”]. One of the displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display of “It is intense heat” in the conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 91 (A9)], and the third display and the above-described display The fourth display is another display, and the first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a first time [e.g., 10 seconds] elapses. The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds] elapses, and the first time after the first display starts to be displayed. When the time elapses, the third display may be displayed, and the second display is displayed. When the second time from the start has elapsed, the amusement machine where the fourth display might be displayed, it is characterized. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses. Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. You may not do it.

  Further, the second display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses. The display mode may be changeable. In addition, at least a part of the display mode may change until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. You may not do it.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start after the first display starts. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts displaying. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time elapses after the second display starts, only the fourth display may be displayed, or after the second display starts the second display. When time elapses, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started, the fourth display may be always displayed, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started displaying. The fourth display may not be displayed. The third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode, or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have higher or lower jackpot reliability. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same between the third display and the fourth display.

  The first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 93 (A1)], and the second display is the countdown display. Display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 93 (A1)], and the countdown display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect display, etc.]. This is a display for notifying the timing until it is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 93 (A1) count down the time until the pseudo-ream occurs. Announcement by display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Moreover, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

  In addition, “an operation means that can be operated by a player [for example, an effect button 136 or the like] is provided, the first display is an operation effective period display, and the second display is the operation effective period display. And the operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may have a trap that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may indicate other than the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may not indicate a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

  Further, the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 88 (A1)], and the second display is the period display [for example, FIG. 88 (A1 ) Second chance up meter CMTb etc.]

  The period display is a display for notifying a first timing [for example, a timing at which an advance notice of a chance up by the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 88 (A2) or the like is started]. In the first period [for example, the period during which duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 88 (A1) to FIG. 88 (A2), etc.] Is a timing when there is a possibility that the character BOY will display a chance-up notice, etc., and the first timing is notified from the start to the end of the first period. , A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Further, the first timing may be one in which only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, and display other than the sixth display is also started to display in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be. The first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be.

  Further, only the first timing may be notified during the period from the start of the first period to the end, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. In addition, the first timing may be always notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first period may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start of the first period to the end, and in addition to the period from the start of the first period to the end, One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed as time elapses.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may be changed at the first speed as time passes, or at least part of the second display is changed as time passes. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, according to the passage of time, only at least a part of the display form of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display There may be cases where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, “when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, rather than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed. In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to confirm and display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that when the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  Further, the game table characterized in that the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 91 (A1) to (A9)]. ”Was also explained.

  Further, the second display is an effect display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a bag in a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 91 (A4) to (A9), etc.], etc. . ”Was also explained.

In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained. In addition, the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ”Was also explained.
In the above description,

“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game machine equipped with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.]

  One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A1)],

  The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A1)], and the countdown display provides a certain effect. This is a display for notifying the timing until the countdown is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A1) to (A7), the pseudo-ream is performed by the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1. The display mode of the first display is set to the first display mode [for example, the small size of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A1)] while the countdown display is displayed. Display mode etc.] to the second display mode [for example, large-size display of timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A3) It may vary in like etc.], wherein the first display mode the second display mode is a display mode different, amusement machine, characterized in that. Was explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect increases by changing the display mode of the countdown display, the player may be able to be entertained until a certain effect is performed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where attention can be paid to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may include only a countdown display or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include a countdown display or may not include a countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may notify only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by other than performing the countdown. You may do. In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be.

  Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

  In addition, “the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is completed before the symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (1) to (7) The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and terminated during the symbol variation display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, and therefore the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be completed by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended by the time the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. There may be a case where the countdown display does not end before the change display ends.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be completed only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition to the end of the variable display, the countdown display may end.

  Further, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size, etc.], and the second display mode is , The first display is a display mode displayed in a second display size [for example, large size, etc.], and the first display size and the second display size, A game table characterized by a larger display size. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display size of the countdown display may be increased, whereby the degree of expectation for the countdown display may be changed (attention is paid to the countdown display having an increased display size).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

  Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is also displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The displayed display mode may be used. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

Note that the display sizes may be the same, for example, the same display size, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.
Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

  In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 73 (3), etc.] A game table, wherein the display is displayed in the first display mode. ”Was also explained.

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. A display mode other than one display mode may be displayed. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode. When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. If it is not displayed in the display mode, there may be a gap.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display is displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame preview of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 73 (2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A2) to (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 becomes “03:00” indicating that the remaining three seconds are displayed during the countdown display in the timer display of the timer preview display TM1, the timer preview display TM1 is displayed. Is changing from small size to large size etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where it can be expected that the display mode changes during the countdown display.

  Here, the first display may be changed only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the first display is the first display during the display of the countdown display. The display mode may always be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display. You may change from the one display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it will be easier to finalize the jackpot symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be a case where an expectation for changing the first display to the second display mode can be provided.

  When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may always be finally displayed, or the first display is the first display mode. Even if the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  The first display is a display whose display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 94A2 to A3, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position of the display screen changes from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen 208 to approximately the center, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display position of the first display may change, thereby giving a visual change and improving the effect.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position is changed, or may be one other than the display position. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

  “When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 94 (A2) to FIG. As shown in (), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the substantially center, etc.] A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, so there are cases where attention can be paid to the first display.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. If it changes to the 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of the 1st display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  Moreover, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change even in cases other than the case where the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1 or the like] may be performed, and the first display is performed by performing the movement display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A2) to (A3), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by an enlarged display animation, and the display position also changes, etc.] A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of production may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only moving display is performed, or may be one in which display other than the moving display is also performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the moving display is always performed, or the movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the moving display, and the display position of other than the display position of the first display is also changed by performing the moving display. Also good. In addition, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, and the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. .

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even if the display position of the first display changes due to something other than the movement display being performed. Good.

  In addition, “the game stand, wherein the countdown by the countdown display proceeds even during the display of the movement display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the movement display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued in addition to the display of the movement display.

Further, during the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, and during the display of the movement display, things other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

  Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the movement display.

  Further, “the countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A2) to (A7), the timer notice display TM1 A game stand in which the timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by a countdown in the display]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the countdown display may be performed only for counting down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be performed other than counting down the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, “a display indicating 0 in the countdown display indicates that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 94A7 to 94A8]. As described above, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the “notice” character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition, it is also possible to notify other than the timing at which a certain performance is performed. Further, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

  In addition, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has been reached only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain performance.

In addition, after the display indicating 0 in the countdown display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be erased [For example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A7) to (A11), A game stand characterized in that after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the presentation is not made redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display The display may also be deleted. Further, the countdown display may be erased after the display indicating 0 in the countdown display is displayed, or the countdown display is erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 94 (A8), etc.], and the second display The display is a display not included in the certain effect, and when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A7) to (A11), after the timer display in the timer preview display TM1 becomes 0, the timer preview display TM1 is replaced with the timer display. A game stand characterized in that the word “attention” is displayed, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, thereby improving the effect of rendering the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in effects other than a certain effect. The second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. The second display may be included in a certain effect.

  Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display May be configured such that displays other than the countdown display are also deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may not be deleted after the second display is displayed.

  Further, only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the is displayed, the countdown display may be deleted even after the second display is displayed.

  In addition, “the display unit is a unit configured by a plurality of display units, and one of the plurality of display units is a first display unit [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.] One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, The first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (A1), a small timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.] A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode May be displayed on the display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. In other cases, the first display may be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A2) to (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed as a decorative design. And the like, which are displayed on the display device 208]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the display means to be displayed is changed when the display mode of the first display is changed, there may be a case where it is possible to visually enhance the presentation effect.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display unit. There may be cases, and when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display unit. It may be displayed on other display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display unit. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display unit is changed to the second display mode, the first display is changed to the second display unit. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display form displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display form. The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is changed to the second display mode. May be displayed on the display means.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a pre-reading notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display or may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a prefetch notice.

  Further, when the countdown display is performed as a pre-reading notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display to be performed next. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped, interrupted, or canceled during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the symbol fixed stop timing is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown It may be possible to stop the time display, or to continue the time notification by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally during the symbol stop display.

  In addition, when displaying a countdown display as a pre-reading notice, if a hold whose change time varies depending on the number of hold (for example, a hold whose change time is indefinite) is on hold, the countdown display should not be performed. Also good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown will become 0. For example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo-ream, reach of the reach) In the case of development, etc., it is preferable to perform only with the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when a suspension with an indefinite variation time is in the suspension. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, or a telop display such as “In the midst of a hot attack”) For example, it is sufficient if the countdown of the timer is completed before the subject's suspension of digestion is completed. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that forcibly adjusts the time at the same timing (for example, the start of a suspended symbol fluctuation display that has been subject to prefetching) even when an effect that needs to be synchronized occurs. Also good.

  The countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, during the jackpot game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final When the big hit end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book end is forcibly The combined time may be displayed (for example, “00:00” is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, and an effect is generated).

  Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the countdown display the time until the production by a simultaneous production, the effect by RTC, etc. starts.

  Further, the display device may be composed of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as rendering movable means and decorative members, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, It may be configured such that these can be visually recognized. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state where the back side can be visually recognized and a state where it is difficult to visually confirm with the liquid crystal shutter.

  Further, the operation mode of the effect moving means such as an accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the time notification by the countdown display.

  In addition, a display for notifying that an effect may be exerted on the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as inciting that something may be generated by a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen on the countdown display (when you do nothing or when you do something), and when another character appears, you will always do something It is also possible to perform an effect such that something is always performed when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters that appear, the easier it may be to win.

  In addition, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to finally become a big hit, or when a chance up notice is given, it may be easy to finally become a big hit.

  Moreover, even if the chance up meter is enlarged / reduced in part or in whole, or promoted (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes), etc. Good.

<< Embodiment 4 >>
Next, a game table according to Embodiment 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 155. FIG. 102 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 102A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 102A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 102 to 104, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emit light, the light emitting means is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is shown in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date that represents the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 102 (b) following FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting units emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 102 (c) following FIG. 102 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, the portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the common symbol, and the button notice display h110. , Part of the ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and part of the advance notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 1 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 102 (d) following FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 102 (e) following FIG. 102 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation has been completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display The other part of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 102 (f) following FIG. 102 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls forward of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which a deforming operation is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.
FIG. 103 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 103A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 103A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date that represents the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 103 (b) following FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting units emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 103 (c) following FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and a button notice. It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 2 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 103 (d) following FIG. 103 (c) shows a state where the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 103 (e) following FIG. 103 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Due to the deformation of the movable body 2, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and the other part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 103 (f) following FIG. 103 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are located at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the production example shown in FIG. 102 is performed. In some cases, the case where the example of the effect shown in FIG.
FIG. 104 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 104A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 104A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date that represents the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 104 (b) following FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting unit emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 104 (c) following FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 start to move from the initial position at the same time and are positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are part of the decorative symbol, part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, 4 symbols aa4, ordinary figure holding number aa5, part of ordinary symbol 4th symbol aa6, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be a case where the display does not overlap any one of the above. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, there may be cases where the timing of the end of movement is different.

  FIG. 104 (d) following FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 is moved. Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. The start timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 104 (e) following FIG. 104 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1, 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operations are completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. The display may not overlap with any one of the displays. Note that the end timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 104 (f) following FIG. 104 (e) shows that after the movable bodies 1 and 2 return to the shape before deformation at the same time, the movement starts at the initial position and ends at the same time. 2 shows a state in which the respective light emitting means 2 are turned off simultaneously. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before a deformation | transformation may be started at a separate timing, and may be complete | finished at a separate timing. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even when the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is made the same, the end timing may be different. In addition, the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, and the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. Also good. Further, even if the timings of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the timing of the movement end may be the same, or to the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting units of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the overlapping position in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of deformation is performed at the same time. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, even if it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the production example shown in FIG. 102 or the production example shown in FIG. 103 is performed. In addition, the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 102 and the effect example shown in FIG. 103 are performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 113, a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described. The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 105 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90. FIG.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotating shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-like horizontally-long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, the LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. 90c3.

  The LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a is provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2nd row, 1st column, 3rd row, 1st column, 2nd row, 6th column). , And the third row and the sixth column are not provided with a light emitting diode). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diode c1 along the outer periphery of the arc portion. -C4 are provided. All of the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different color), or a part of the light emitting diodes may be a single color light emitting diode and the other part may be a full color LED. All may be composed of full-color LEDs. Moreover, you may use light sources other than a light emitting diode for the light emitting diode (a11-c4) mounted in the movable body 90a.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 106A to 106G show the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed step by step when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. 106 to 112, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is expressed in white, and the case where the light emitting diode is turned on is expressed in light ink. Also, in FIGS. 106 to 112, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 106A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. You may arrange | position the cable connected to the movable body 90 behind a arm part so that a player cannot visually recognize. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string “in preparation”.

  FIG. 106 (b) following FIG. 106 (a) shows that all of the movable bodies 90 a, 90 b, and 90 c mounted on the movable bodies 90 a, 90 b, and 90 c are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the light emitting diode is lit is shown. Further, the display of the character string “in preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 106 (c) following FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 106 (d) following FIG. 106 (c) shows a state where the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are each rotated simultaneously. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 106 (e) following FIG. 106 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 106 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 106 (d).

  FIG. 106 (f) following FIG. 106 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 106 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 106 (d).

  FIG. 106 (g) following FIG. 106 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (a) to 107 (n) show examples of effects using the movable body 90 step by step.

  FIG. 107A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 107 (b) following FIG. 107 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are displayed after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 107 (c) following FIG. 107 (b) shows a state where the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 107 (d) following FIG. 107 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11-a35 mounted in the movable body 90a can be visually recognized because the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate.

  In FIG. 107 (e) following FIG. 107 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d).

  FIG. 107 (f) following FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d).

  FIG. 107 (g) following FIG. 107 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 107 (h) following FIG. 107 (g), the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 107 (i) following FIG. 107 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 107 (j) following FIG. 107 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 107 (k) following FIG. 107 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 107 (l) following FIG. 107 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

  FIG. 107 (m) following FIG. 107 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (l). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 107 (i) to 107 (l) are returned.

  107 (n) following FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position, and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 108 to 111 is performed.

  An example of an effect using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (a) to 108 (n) show step-by-step production examples using modifications of the movable body 90. FIG. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction on the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 108A shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  108 (b) following FIG. 108 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  108 (c) following FIG. 108 (b) shows a state where the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 108 (d) following FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is moved further upward and stopped at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 108 (e) following FIG. 108 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously moving downward. Yes. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 108 (f) following FIG. 108 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c are simultaneously returned to their original positions. Each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position at different timings.

  108 (g) following FIG. 108 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 108 (h) following FIG. 108 (g) shows that all of the light emitting elements mounted on the movable body 90 are located in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 108 (i) following FIG. 108 (h) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90 b by moving only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 upward. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 108 (j) following FIG. 108 (i) shows a state where only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light from the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 108 (k) following FIG. 108 (j) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90 c by moving only the movable body 90 c provided on the movable body 90 upward. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 108 (l) following FIG. 108 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light from the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 108 (m) following FIG. 108 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 108 (i) to (l) are returned.

  108 (n) following FIG. 108 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position, and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 107 to 111 is performed.

  An example of an effect example using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (a) to 109 (n) show step-by-step production examples using modifications of the movable body 90. FIG. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 109A shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 109 (b) following FIG. 109 (a) shows that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 109 (c) following FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1, and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 109 (d) following FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted in the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c.

  In FIG. 109 (e) following FIG. 109 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 109 (d).

  FIG. 109 (f) following FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 107 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 109 (d).

  FIG. 109 (g) following FIG. 109 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 109 (h) following FIG. 109 (g) shows all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 109 (i) following FIG. 109 (h), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 109 (j) following FIG. 109 (i), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1-b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 109 (k) following FIG. 109 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 109 (l) following FIG. 109 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible by rotating the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 109 (m) following FIG. 109 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 109 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 109 (d). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original postures so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 109 (i) to 109 (l) are returned.

  109 (n) following FIG. 109 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 107 to 111 is performed.

  An example of an effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (a) to 110 (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  FIG. 110A shows a decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative design, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a), a confirmation display of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 110 (c) following FIG. 110 (b) shows a decorative symbol variation display by digestion of the hold icon a <b> 2 in the pre-reading notice mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, A button notice display h110, and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a button operation notice effect is performed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, the movable body 90 includes a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112. It is overlapped.

  FIG. 110 (d) following FIG. 110 (c) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. An image is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design, a part of the merchant character mode variation icon ad1, and a part of the sun image are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 110 (e) following FIG. 110 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been started. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design and a part of the merchant character-like variation icon ad <b> 1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e) shows that the SP reach effect display by the character display displaying the character string “game is won” is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of Tono is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 110 (g) following FIG. 110 (f) shows that “SPECIFICATION 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the SP reach effect is finished in the ornamental symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and displayed as a temporary stop. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the character string “Win” and the confrontation scene between the character and the enemy character ends and the character of the character wins is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the effect display won by the Tono character is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 110 (h) following FIG. 110 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the decorative design is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  110 (i) following FIG. 110 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the 1R big hit game effect display of the 15R special big hit game. On the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7”, which is a big hit stop symbol, is displayed, and on the upper right, a character string “1R” indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A character string “80 balls” indicating the total number of numbers and a character string “number of jackpots: 1” indicating the number of jackpots are displayed on the lower right. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the 1R big hit game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 110 (j) following FIG. 110 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character string “Dito” after the 15R special big hit game is completed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the character string “Dito” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 110 (k) following FIG. 110 (j) is shifted to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string “Right-handed!”, A pattern that clearly indicates right-handedness, a variation icon ad4, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string “Please do right-handed!”, A part of the pattern that clearly shows that right-handing is made, a part of the change icon ad4, and the special figure 2 hold A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 110 (l) following FIG. 110 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of “door opening error”, a character string of “sphere full error”, a variation icon ad5, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac2 of a pre-reading notice mode are displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Also, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of “door opening error”, a part of the character string of “sphere full error”, a part of the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. All of the above-described displays may be overlapped by the movable body 90, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not be overlapped.
An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which a notice effect is performed by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 107 when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button button notice effect. Show. Even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 107 may be performed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (a) is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (a) is not performed. May be. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 107 to 111 is performed.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 107 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 111B may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (b) is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (a) is performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared to the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 111 (b) is performed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed easily. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 107 to 111 is performed.

  A modification of how the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 looks at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located behind the game board 125 having game nails.

  FIG. 112A shows an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate-like shape and includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 112B is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate-like shape, and includes a vertically long rectangular cutout at a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are provided via the notch portion of the structure 30b. Visible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 112 (c) is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30 c at the initial position. The structure 30c is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is not visible to the player because it is overlapped with the structure 30c. Note that a transmissive liquid crystal device may be arranged in the structure 30c so that the movable body 90 positioned behind the structure 30c is more easily visible during non-display than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  A modified example of the position and moving operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. Note that the liquid crystal display device a208 and the light-emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, and may be rotatable.

  FIG. 113B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. Note that the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 113 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The diagram on the left side in FIG. 113C shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 113 (c) shows a state where the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. The diagram on the right side in FIG. 113C shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. Note that the movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 124. The structure 247 used in the production examples in FIGS. 114 to 124 is a structure having a substantially circular front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface, and can be moved in the vertical direction. 114 to 123, the left diagram shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle diagram shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left diagram and the structure 247. The case of seeing through is shown. The diagram on the right side is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the Sabohani character display SB or the sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the figure, the line of sight that the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight that the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. Note that the shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 of the present example are determined such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined eye angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. The decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 114 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a) shows that the sabotani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from below. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 114 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In the description of the player's line of sight in this example and the example shown below, “substantially front” defines that the angle of the line of sight is within about ± 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper direction defines an angle of the eyeline of about + 20 ° or more as substantially obliquely upward, and the substantially obliquely downward direction defines the angle of the eyeline of −about 20 ° or less as an approximately obliquely downward direction. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the description of the player's line of sight, it is only necessary that the position of the line of sight is higher than that of the front in the substantially oblique direction, and the position of the line of sight is lower than that in the substantially front direction.

  In FIG. 114 (c) following FIG. 114 (b), the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 114 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 114 (d) following FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper body portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 114 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 114 (e) following FIG. 114 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

Thus, this example is an example in which the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 115 to 123 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and at least one of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, and rotation is displayed. One or a plurality of movements may be made so that a player viewing from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB, or may be overlapped with the structure 247. While the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position is moved and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved in at least one of the upward direction, the downward direction, the left direction, the right direction, and the rotation, or a plurality of movements. Thus, there may be a case where a player who is viewing from substantially the front can visually recognize at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 115 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 115A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 115 (b) following FIG. 115 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 115 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 115 (c) following FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 115 (d) following FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state of FIG. 115 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 115 (e) following FIG. 115 (d) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 115 (e), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, the structure 247 is overlapped again. This is an example in which moving display is performed at the position to be displayed. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 123 is performed.

  FIG. 116 shows step-by-step examples using the structure 247 and the structure 50t. The structure 50t is a structure formed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. 116 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a) shows that the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 116 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 116 (e) following FIG. 116 (d) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol. In the state of FIG. 116 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique bottom is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlapped with the structure 50t. It is an example which performs a movement display to a position. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 117 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247.

  FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 117 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  Thus, in this example, the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is not overlapped with the structure 247 after being moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example of moving display. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 118 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 118A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 118A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 118 (b) following FIG. 118 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen during the decorative symbol variation display. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. Further, the Sabohani character display SB in this example is larger than the Sabohani character display SB shown in FIG. 117 and the like.

  FIG. 118 (c) following FIG. 118 (b) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247, and the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A substantially lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 118 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize approximately the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 118 (e) following FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  In this way, in this example, the movement display is performed from a position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change does not overlap the structure 247 to a position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example in which a movement display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 later, and a part of the Sabohani character display SB is an example of an effect that is always visible from a player with a substantially frontal eye. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 119 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. 119 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 119 (b) following FIG. 119 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 119 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  119 (c) following FIG. 119 (b) is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The sun display su1 is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 119 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1 and the Sabohani character display SB, while the player is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 119 (d) following FIG. 119 (c) shows an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. This shows a state where an animated display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3.

  FIG. 119 (e) following FIG. 119 (d) shows the sun display su1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed in the structure 247. It is an example which performs a movement display to the position which is not overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 120A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 120A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 120 (b) following FIG. 120 (a) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohani character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 120 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1, whereas the player is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and at least part of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 120 (c) subsequent to FIG. 120 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su 1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon a3. In the state of FIG. 120 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above the sun display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d) shows that the sun display su 1 is further down on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position not overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1. .

  In this way, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display are displayed after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are overlapped with the structure 247. In this example, su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 121 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 121A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude radially from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the Sabohani character display SB used as a notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 121 (b) following FIG. 121 (a) shows a substantially upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, whereas the player sees the structure 247 from obliquely above. The watching player can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b), the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef 1 is displayed on the screen. It is moved and displayed so as to appear from below. In the state of FIG. 121 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef <b> 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body part of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 114 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 121 (e) following FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef 1 move further upward. The Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247 and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the display of the Sabohani character display SB used for the change notice is moved from the position where the Sabohani character display SB overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Is displayed at a position where the effect image ef1 associated with the Sabohani character display SB is not overlapped with the structure 247 before being displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 122 shows three examples of effects using the structure 247. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 122 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 122 (a) shows a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display h113 and the balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when you find a character!” It is displayed so as to overlap a part. The balloon display h114 of the character string “chance when a character is found!” Is a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB appears, and the Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 122 (b) following FIG. 122 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character appears!” Is displayed. The character string “character appears!” May be displayed before the appearance of the Sabohani character display SB, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 122 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) is an enlarged display of the sabotani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character expanding!” Is displayed. The character string “Character expanding!” May be displayed before the start of the expansion of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of expansion, or may be displayed after the start of expansion. In the state of FIG. 121 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  Thus, in this example, before displaying the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed. After the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed is performed, and the position overlapping the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the Sabohani character display SB displayed on the screen is enlarged and displayed to notify that the Sabohani character display SB is enlarged. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohan character display SB, the easier it is to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left diagram in FIG. 122A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 122 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the savohani 2 of the savohani 1 that are displayed as a warning notice of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variability display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 122 (A), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from obliquely above. The player who is present can visually recognize at least part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani and at least part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at positions overlapping the structure 247. is there. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the easier it may be to finally display the big hit symbol.

  122 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. FIG. 122 (A) shows the decorative symbol display device 208, where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani, which becomes a notice display of the variation, is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A character display SB2 of the savory 2 serving as a notice display of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 122 (a), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from substantially obliquely above. The player who is viewing can view at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely below can view at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

  In this way, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. It is an example displayed at a position overlapping with the body 50t. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping with the plurality of structures, the easier it is to make the big hit symbol finally displayed.

  FIG. 123 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 123A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 123 (b) following FIG. 123 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 123 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the approximate center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 123 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, but the player who is viewing from substantially below the Sabohani character display SB. At least a portion is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, the display is moved to a position not overlapping the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the body 247 is moved and the Sabohani character display SB is overlapped by the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 124 is performed. Also good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved behind the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is a notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB may be delayed.

  FIG. 124 shows an effect example using the structure 247. FIG. 124 (a) shows a state where the effect image ef1 and the Sabohani character display SB are displayed at positions where they overlap with the structure 247. FIG. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 124 (b), the structure 247 is visually recognized from the upper left to the lower right. A player who is viewing the structure 247 from the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, although a part of the effect image ef1 is visible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from the upper left side to the lower right side can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire Sabohani character display SB. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is viewing from the front. In addition, the production in this example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 123 is performed. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134, an example of an effect using a hold icon or a variation icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 125 to 134 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the hold icon and the variation icon, but the locus and movement of the hold icon and the variation icon are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display showing the direction of.

  FIG. 125 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. 125 is an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 125 (h) and 125 (i) after FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (g), and FIGS. 125 (j) and 125 (g) after FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 (a) to (i). 125 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 125 (b) subsequent to FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 125 (c) following FIG. 125 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 125 (d) following FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 125 (e) following FIG. 125 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 125 (f) following FIG. 125 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display informing that the operation effect display is performed, or may be a notice display informing that the SP reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 125 (g) following FIG. 125 (f) shows a notice symbol m 1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 125 (h) following FIG. 125 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 125 (i) following FIG. 125 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 (j) and 125 (k).

  125 (j) following FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m 1 shown in FIG. 125 (g) ends and the notice display m 1 is erased. The hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 125 (k) following FIG. 125 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 ends on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol It is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 126 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. 126 shows an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 126 (h) to (j) after FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (g) and FIGS. 126 (k) to 126 (g) after FIGS. 126 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 (a) to (j). FIG. 126 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 126 (b) following FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 126 (c) following FIG. 126 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 126 (d) following FIG. 126 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 126 (e) following FIG. 126 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 126 (f) following FIG. 126 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal that has been displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter referred to as the "going out hold icon" with the character string "going out" displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Instead of the on-the-go hold icon, a hold icon having a default shape with a lighter color may be used.

  FIG. 126 (g) subsequent to FIG. 126 (f) shows a notice symbol m 1 indicating the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 126 (h) following FIG. 126 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 for returning to the pedestal where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  126 (i) following FIG. 126 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the pedestal before the movement is completed. The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the on-going hold icon.

126 (j) following FIG. 126 (i), the on-going hold icon is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 (k) to (m).

  126 (k) following FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 126 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 is erased. Is done. On the pedestal on which the on-the-go hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the notice display m1 (default form) overlaps the on-the-go hold icon and reappears. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of the disappearance of the advance notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the advance of the advance notice display m1. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 126 (l) following FIG. 126 (k) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the default mode is before moving. The state displayed on the pedestal is shown. FIG. 126 (m) shows a state in which the on-going hold icon is deleted.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol In FIG. 5, an example of temporarily displaying a hold icon in another mode instead of the hold icon being moved is shown. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed.

  FIG. 127 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. 127 shows an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 127 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 127 (a) to (g), and FIG. 127 (j) after FIGS. 127 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 (a) to (i). 127 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 127 (b) following FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 127 (c) subsequent to FIG. 127 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 127 (d) following FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 127 (e) following FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 127 (f) following FIG. 127 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a hold icon temporary movement animation is displayed in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal displayed by the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, and used as a notice of the change. Display may be used.

  FIG. 127 (g) subsequent to FIG. 127 (f) shows a notice display m 1 displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed most recently. Is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 127 (h) following FIG. 127 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 127 (i) following FIG. 127 (h) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends. The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 (j) and (k).

  127 (j) following FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 finishes the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 127 (g), and the notice display m1 is erased. The special icon 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears on the pedestal, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 moves toward the original pedestal. Icon temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. However, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation. You may display so that it may overlap. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 127 (k) following FIG. 127 (j), the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the holding icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol Is a temporary display of the hold icon on the right instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed.

  FIG. 128 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 128 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 125 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 128 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 125 (j) and 125 (g) after FIGS. 128 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to (i). 128 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 128 (b) following FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 128 (f) following FIG. 128 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of gas.

  FIG. 128 (g) following FIG. 128 (f) shows that the notice display m <b> 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 128 (h) following FIG. 128 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed.

FIG. 128 (i) following FIG. 128 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (j) and 128 (k).

  128 (j) following FIGS. 128 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 128 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, a hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, and the character string “in preparation” remains displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  FIG. 128 (k) following FIG. 128 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

Thus, in this example, a pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a gusset notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol. There is no example.
FIG. 129 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 reserved symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 129 (b) following FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 129 (c) following FIG. 129 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 129 (f) following FIG. 129 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 129 (g) subsequent to FIG. 129 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 129 (h) following FIG. 129 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 129 (i) following FIG. 129 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 129 (j) following FIG. 129 (i) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 129 (k) following FIG. 129 (j) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 129 (l) following FIG. 129 (k) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 129 (m) following FIG. 129 (l) shows the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 129 (n) following FIG. 129 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a warning display, and the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies continuously continues multiple times. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 130 shows staged examples using the hold icon in stages.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 130 (b) following FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (d) following FIG. 130 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 (f) following FIG. 130 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 130 (g) subsequent to FIG. 130 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 130 (h) following FIG. 130 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 130 (i) following FIG. 130 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 130 (j) following FIG. 130 (i) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 (k) following FIG. 130 (j) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (l) following FIG. 130 (k) shows a preview display m 1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 130 (m) following FIG. 130 (l) shows the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 130 (n) following FIG. 130 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished with the notice display m1 as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed a plurality of times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed. If there are not enough hold icons used for the pseudo-continuous notice, a change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 131 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  131 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 131 (b) following FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 131 (c) following FIG. 131 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 131 (d) subsequent to FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 131 (e) following FIG. 131 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 131 (f) following FIG. 131 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 131 (g) following FIG. 131 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is a middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 131 (h) following FIG. 131 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 131 (i) following FIG. 131 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  In FIG. 131 (j) following FIG. 131 (i), a reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “reach!” Is displayed.

In this way, in this example, the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, so that the decorative symbol variation display is changed again and the reach effect is started. It is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed.
FIG. 132 shows an example of an effect using a variable icon step by step.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2 retention number aa3, and the special symbol 2 retained symbol aa4. The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (e) shows that the variation icon ad 1 is displayed from the variation icon display area 280 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out and moves as a notice display m2. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, no variation icon is displayed on the base of the variation icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or may be a display used as a pre-reading notice. May be.

  FIG. 132 (g) subsequent to FIG. 132 (f) shows a notice symbol m 2 in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 132 (h) following FIG. 132 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m2 that returns to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “Decoration 5” is finished and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2.

  FIG. 132 (i) following FIG. 132 (h) shows a state where the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is ended with the notice display m 2 as the fluctuation icon ad 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice that the decoration symbol variation display is re-variable is performed when the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decoration symbol as a notice display during temporary stop display of the off symbol. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed. In addition, not only the variation icon in the default mode but also a variation icon in a mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 in this example. FIG. Show.

  133 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 133 (b) following FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (c) following FIG. 133 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (d) following FIG. 133 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (f) following FIG. 133 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed in the special symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 133 (g) following FIG. 133 (f) shows that the notice display m <b> 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 133 (h) following FIG. 133 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (i) following FIG. 133 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 133 (j) following FIG. 133 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon move animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. .

  FIG. 133 (k) following FIG. 133 (j) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (l) following FIG. 133 (k) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (m) following FIG. 133 (l) shows a notice symbol m 1 in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 2” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 3” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 133 (n) following FIG. 133 (m) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (o) subsequent to FIG. 133 (n) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 133 (p) following FIG. 133 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. Yes.

  FIG. 133 (q) subsequent to FIG. 133 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (r) following FIG. 133 (q) shows a special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (s) subsequent to FIG. 133 (r) shows a notice display m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 7” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 8” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 133 (t) following FIG. 133 (s) shows a moving animation of the advance notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is finished, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed.

  In FIG. 133 (u) following FIG. 133 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends. Reach production will be performed.

  As described above, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon is used as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, and a continuous notice that collides with the middle design of the decorative design is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, thereby developing a reach effect. is there. In this example, the notice display that appears for the first time and the second time is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears for the third time is used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 134 is performed.

  FIG. 134 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon. FIG. 134 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of a character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 134 (b) following FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which an increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the form of a character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b) is a special figure 2 in the form of a character in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which an increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (f) following FIG. 134 (e) shows a special figure 2 hold icon b 2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special map 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 are all in the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice or suggest that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used in combination with a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 134 (g) following FIG. 134 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 is changed to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 is changed to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 is changed. The notice display c3 ′ shows a changed state. The notice displays c1 ′ to c3 ′ are all in the same display form, and have a display form in which the large-displayed Tono character is fighting by pulling out a Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display c1 ′ fights against “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, A battle animation in which the notice display c2 ′ fights “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208b and the battle animation fights “decoration 5” in which the notice display c3 ′ temporarily stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG. 134 (h), which follows FIG. 134 (g), shows the advance notice while the notice display c1 ′ changes to c1, the notice display c2 ′ changes to c2, and the notice display c3 ′ changes to c3. The notice c3 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, the notice display c2 was showing the special figure 1 hold icon a3 The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again.

  FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h) shows that the notice display c 1 returns to the position before movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display c 2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a 3. The movement animation is returned to the position before the movement, and the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect of “decoration 7” is executed.

  In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays, so that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 125 to 133 is performed. In addition, when the number of the hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the notice display.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 155. 135 (a) to 135 (c) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 135 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono is displayed in the approximate center of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  In FIG. 135 (b) following FIG. 135 (a), a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 135 (c) following FIG. 135 (b) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed above the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. The horizontal width of the balloon display f1 and the horizontal width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but the width and height are different from each other. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon indications f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 136A to 136I show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  136 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  136 (b) following FIG. 136 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  136 (c) following FIG. 136 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). Then, after stopping and displaying at the approximate center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed all at once. Good. The same configuration may be used for other balloon display.

  In FIG. 136 (d) following FIG. 136 (c), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player is displayed. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 136 (e) following FIG. 136 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark in the balloon display f1 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 136 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation of moving upward is performed on the balloon display f1 due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is performed simultaneously with a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left.

  In FIG. 136 (f) following FIG. 136 (e), a balloon animation f 2 that appears from the right end of the screen moves to the left, is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f 1 moves upward. The moving animation to be performed is shown in a state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

  FIG. 136 (g) following FIG. 136 (f) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 136 (h) following FIG. 136 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string in the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap the balloon display f3. The horizontal width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the horizontal width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the horizontal width and height are different. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  Further, FIG. 136 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upwards due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and the movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed simultaneously.

  In FIG. 136 (i) following FIG. 136 (h), a balloon animation f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen moves to the right, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The moving animation is performed and is displayed at the substantially upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 indicates a state where it is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, the balloon display f2 of the samurai character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may be deleted after the balloon display f2 is deleted, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. The balloon display f2 may be erased at the same time or after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth (n is an arbitrary number) of pseudo continuous display ) May be deleted before starting, or may be deleted before displaying the temporary stop display. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot, or the same as the balloon display f1 of the character. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, the animation may be erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, or may be erased so as to exit from the direction of each appearance. The same applies to the balloon display described in the subsequent drawings.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed. Note that the balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes each component of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) pattern, character string display, frame, character name display, character In each face image), at least a part of each component may be displayed as an animation, only a part thereof may be displayed as an animation, or all may be displayed as an animation. For example, an animation display in which the symbol of the clear mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the character string display blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character kisses may be displayed. The whole balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of an animation display in which the pattern of the clear mark rotates, an animation display in which the character string display blinks, and an animation display in which the character kisses. Alternatively, the character string display may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character pokes up during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing may be displayed. The animation display of each component of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original animation display after moving the position One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Moreover, a part of at least one animation display of each component of the balloon display may overlap a part of another animation of each component of the balloon display. In addition, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each component of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (m) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 137 (b) following FIG. 137 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 137 (c) following FIG. 137 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 137 (d) following FIG. 137 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 137 (e) following FIG. 137 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. Then, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 137 (f) following FIG. 137 (e), the moving animation that moves upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 137 (g) following FIG. 137 (f) is displayed such that the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 137 (h) following FIG. 137 (g) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  FIG. 137 (i) following FIG. 137 (h) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 137 (j) following FIG. 137 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, thereby deleting the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloons move upward at the same speed. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 137 (k) following FIG. 137 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen. Has been.

  In FIG. 137 (l) following FIG. 137 (k), the balloon display f3 by the princess character appears so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 137 (m) following FIG. 137 (l) shows a state where a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (a) to 138 (m) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 138 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 138 (b) following FIG. 138 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 138 (c) following FIG. 138 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 138 (d) following FIG. 138 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 138 (e) following FIG. 138 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 138 (f) following FIG. 138 (e) shows a state in which a balloon animation f 2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps the balloon part of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, and therefore, the character string of “Morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character and the character image of “don” are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 138 (g) following FIG. 138 (f), after the movement animation that moves toward the left of the balloon display f2 ends, the movement animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 138 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string of “the weather in the morning” and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f2 The upper half of is visible. It should be noted that at a certain timing between FIG. 138 (f) and FIG. 138 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state where a part of the pattern of the clear mark is displayed and no character string is displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 138 (h) following FIG. 138 (g), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 138 (i) following FIG. 138 (h) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 138 (j) following FIG. 138 (i) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 138 (k) following FIG. 138 (j) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f3 is exactly overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the character string “morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a cloudy mark pattern, and a frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the frog character and the character image of “爺” are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 138 (l) following FIG. 138 (k) shows a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 138 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string “morning in the morning” and the cloudy mark pattern and the frame part of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3. The upper half of is visible. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 137 (m) following FIG. 138 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen. Has been.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described. FIG. 139 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 139 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (m), and FIGS. 139 (r) to (139) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (m). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 139 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special figure 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 139 (b) following FIG. 139 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 139 (c) following FIG. 139 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 139 (d) following FIG. 139 (c) shows that a button notice display h 110 and an operation expiration date display h 112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 139 (e) following FIG. 139 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 139 (f) following FIG. 139 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 139 (g) following FIG. 139 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 139 (h), which follows FIG. 139 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 139 (i) following FIG. 139 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 139 (j) following FIG. 139 (i) is a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f 2 and the balloon display f 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 139 (k) following FIG. 139 (j) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of “honey” displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of “Lance when reach” are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. In addition, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 139 (l) following FIG. 139 (k) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that has appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has appeared, and the movement above the balloon display f3 is also temporarily stopped and displayed. The substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 139 (m) following FIG. 139 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 139 (n) following FIG. 139 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon section in which a face image of a gale character, a character image of “gaze” displayed on the face image of a gale character, a character string and a pattern of “hot” are displayed. It is a display including. Further, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the balloon part such as the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 139 (o) following FIG. 139 (n), the scroll display of the balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 139 (p) following FIG. 139 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scroll-displayed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 139 (q) following FIG. 139 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>

  FIG. 139 (r) following FIGS. 139 (a) to (m) is displayed such that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 which has been stopped in FIG. 139 (m). A moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is shown. That is, this example is an example in which an effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward.

  In FIG. 139 (s) following FIG. 139 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out simultaneously from the right end of the screen. .

  FIG. 139 (t) following FIG. 139 (s) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described. FIG. 140 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 140 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 140 (a) to (j), and FIGS. 140 (m) and 140 (j) after FIGS. The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 140 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 140 (b) following FIG. 140 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 140 (c) following FIG. 140 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  In FIG. 140 (d) following FIG. 140 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button notice display h 110 simulating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 above the balloon display f 1, and the player A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 140 (e) following FIG. 140 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby erasing the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 140 (f) following FIG. 140 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 140 (g) following FIG. 140 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 140 (h), which follows FIG. 140 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 140 (i) following FIG. 140 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 140 (j) following FIG. 140 (i) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f 2 and the balloon display f 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 140 (k) following FIG. 140 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled and displayed downward.

  FIG. 140 (l) following FIG. 140 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 140 (m) following FIGS. 140 (a) to (j) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 so that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 ′ appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 ′, f2, and f3 are scrolled and displayed downward. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 140 (n) following FIG. 140 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 ′ that appears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon indications f1 ′ and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Good.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a) to 141 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  141 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 141 (b) following FIG. 141 (a), a balloon display f 1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which a character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of Tono character, a character string “Pseudo-chance!” And a pattern are displayed on the face image of Tono character. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 ′ is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 141 (c) following FIG. 141 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (d) following FIG. 141 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208, above the balloon display f 1 ′. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  141 (e) following FIG. 141 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 141 (f) following FIG. 141 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ moves upward and a balloon animation f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 ′ was stopped and displayed previously. Further, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 141 (g) following FIG. 141 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2. A button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 141 (h) following FIG. 141 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped, a moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is erased without being displayed above the position where the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed. Further, by displaying the speech balloon display f1 ′ with priority over the speech balloon display f2, when the speech balloon display f2 is moving behind the speech balloon display f1 by scroll display, the speech balloon display f1 of the speech balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured not to display a portion where 'is overlapped. In this case, the face image of the frog character and the character image of the heel in the balloon display f2 are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ′, and are thus scroll-displayed to the position at the upper end of the screen. Thus, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with higher reliability is prioritized and deleted, so that a balloon display with high reliability remains on the screen. It is configured.

  FIG. 141 (i) following FIG. 141 (h) shows a balloon display in which a balloon animation f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed. f3 shows a state in which it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f3 may be erased and a reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  142 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 142 (c) following FIG. 142 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208 and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 142 (d) following FIG. 142 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208, above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 142 (e) following FIG. 142 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby erasing the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. After the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 is displayed so that it appears from the lower part of the screen and the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. It appears to overlap in half.

  FIG. 142 (f) following FIG. 142 (e) shows a moving animation in which the lower half of the balloon display f 1 is overlapped with the balloon display f 2 and both move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 142 (g) following FIG. 142 (f) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 2, and has a chance at the position where the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 overlap. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 142 (h) following FIG. 142 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Also, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the substantially lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (a character string “Today's weather is”, a fine mark pattern or a frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 (“Today's weather is” It overlaps with a part of the character string, cloudy mark pattern and balloon part), and the balloon part of the balloon display 2 ("Today's weather" character string, cloudy mark picture and balloon part frame part) ) Overlaps with a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 ("Today's weather is a character string", a rain mark pattern, or a part of the balloon part frame). There may be cases. For example, the face images of each character may overlap, the character images of each character's name may overlap, or the character's face image overlaps the balloon There may be a case where the balloon part overlaps the face image of the character, or there may be a case where the character image of the character name overlaps the balloon part.

  FIG. 142 (i) following FIG. 142 (h) shows a position where the moving animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed and the upper end of the balloon part f1 and the lower end of the balloon part f3 fit on the screen. The state where the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or terminated is shown. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, two balloon displays are overlapped. However, two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the greater the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping state of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping state of each balloon display may be configured not to be equal. For example, the area where the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap may be smaller or larger than the area where the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 143 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 143 (b) following FIG. 143 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 143 (c) following FIG. 143 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 143 (d) following FIG. 143 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 143 (e), following FIG. 143 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation that moves upward after the balloon display f1 is reduced is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. In addition, the reduction degree of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each of the balloon display components (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced, Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction rate may be different for each configuration.

  FIG. 143 (f) following FIG. 143 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 143 (g) following FIG. 143 (f) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 2 and has a chance to overlap the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 143 (h), which follows FIG. 143 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced and displayed before moving upward, but the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon indications f1 and f2 may be reduced larger or smaller than the other, and the configuration of reducing one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 143 (i) subsequent to FIG. 143 (h) shows a state where the animation moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and stopped. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (a) to 144 (k) show examples of effects using balloon display step by step.

  144 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 144 (b) following FIG. 144 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  144 (c) following FIG. 144 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 144 (d) following FIG. 144 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 144 (e) following FIG. 144 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 ′ by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which a character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of Tono character, a character string “Pseudo-chance!” And a pattern are displayed on the face image of Tono character. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 144 (f) following FIG. 144 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and the balloon display f 1 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ indicates a state where it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1 ′ stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 stopped and displayed before. Further, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  144 (g) following FIG. 144 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ′ is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1 ′. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 144 (h) following FIG. 144 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ is changed to the balloon display f1a is performed. The animation is configured such that, as the balloon part of the balloon display f1 ′ expands and the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a floats instead. . The balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying a character image of “Tono”, a character image of “SP reach” displayed on the face image of the character, and a character string and a pattern of “SP reach confirmation”. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1 ′. Or may be overlapped by the changed balloon display f1a without moving, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 144 (i) following FIG. 144 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to be within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 144 (j) following FIG. 144 (i), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 144 (k) following FIG. 144 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The character string “SP reach confirmation” is deleted and the character string “all rotation reach confirmation” is displayed. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” includes a decorative pattern, a character image of the shrine, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, and a special figure. The display may be overlapped with the display of the second 4th symbol aa4, the number of common figure hold aa5, the 4th symbol aa6 of the normal diagram, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the like.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 145 (b) following FIG. 145 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a princess character display m3 is displayed from the left end of the screen. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the 4th symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the universal figure hold number aa5, and the 4th figure aa6 of the normal figure Yes.

  FIG. 145 (c) following FIG. 145 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. The princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 145 (d) following FIG. 145 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps with substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of “dono”. It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  FIG. 145 (e) following FIG. 145 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

  FIG. 145 (f) following FIG. 145 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

  FIG. 145 (g) following FIG. 145 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 includes a character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a pattern part of a clear mark, and a balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. The princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 145 (h), which follows FIG. 145 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 has a rain mark on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and a cloudy mark pattern part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern portion of the mark and a part of the face image of the frog character.

  FIG. 145 (i) following FIG. 145 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. The princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right and is erased so as to exit from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the samurai character. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (i) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 146 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 146 (b) following FIG. 146 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative design display apparatus 208 is shown. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 146 (c) following FIG. 146 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 146 (d) following FIG. 146 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is performed

  FIG. 146 (e) following FIG. 146 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 146 (f) following FIG. 146 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 146 (g) following FIG. 146 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon indications f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 146 (h) following FIG. 146 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame part of the balloon display f2, the character string part, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and the part of the frame part of the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 146 (i) following FIG. 146 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, the character string portions, the cloudy marks, and the rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position. In other words, the balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be moved while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 147 (b) following FIG. 147 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a smiling character is displayed on the light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 147 (c), which follows FIG. 147 (b), shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 147 (d) following FIG. 147 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 147 (e), following FIG. 147 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  In FIG. 147 (f) following FIG. 147 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 147 (g) following FIG. 147 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 147 (h), following FIG. 147 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame parts of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string part, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 147 (i) following FIG. 147 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, cloudy marks, and rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emission display is performed by the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a) to 148 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol FIG. The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 148 (b) following FIG. 148 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 148 (c) following FIG. 148 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 148 (d) following FIG. 148 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 148 (e) following FIG. 148 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the lord character, part of the character “dono”, and part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 148 (f) following FIG. 148 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a part of the face image of the character, the substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, and the face of the samurai character. It overlaps part of the image.

  FIG. 148 (g) following FIG. 148 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display includes a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the frog character, and a button notice display. h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 all overlap.

  FIG. 148 (h) following FIG. 148 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby deleting the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, part of the face image of the frog character, part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and part of the character image of “princess”. Yes.

  FIG. 148 (i) following FIG. 148 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloud mark pattern, a part of the face image of the frog character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, the rain mark A part of the picture of the princess character and a part of the face image of the princess character overlap all the character images of the “princess”.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, change icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative design, 4th design, mini decorative design, notice display, pre-reading notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, consecutive game count display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 149 (a) to (h) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 149 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 149 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 149 (b) following FIG. 149 (a), a balloon display f 1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. In the balloon display f1 ′, a character image of “dono” and a character string and a pattern of “pseudo-chance chance!” Displayed on the face image of the character and the character image of the character are displayed. It is a display including a speech balloon. The balloon display f1 ′ is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 149 (c) following FIG. 149 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Also, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and hold icon display area 280ab.

  FIG. 149 (d) following FIG. 149 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 149 (e) following FIG. 149 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 ′ by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, the face image of the moth character, the character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the moth character, the character string “Holding change” and the cloudy mark pattern are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 149 (f) following FIG. 149 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward, and the balloon display f2 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 ′ is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 ′ stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 ′ stopped and displayed before. Moreover, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 ′ and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 ′ are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 149 (g) following FIG. 149 (f) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. Yes.

  In FIG. 149 (h) following FIG. 149 (g), the cloudy mark image displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is displayed as a special figure 1 hold icon a4 in place of the default form special figure 1 hold icon a4. Has been. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Also good.

  The effect of this example is an example in which a continuous notice is given by the balloon display f1 ′ and the balloon display f2 ′. The balloon display f1 ′ is used for a notice of the change, and the balloon display f2 ′ is used for a prefetch notice. Also, in this example, the cloudy mark image that was displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon, but the fluctuation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part is also an example. The notice icon used may be moved and displayed inside the balloon part, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 150A to 150I show step-by-step example effects using balloon display. 150 to 152, a sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 150 (a) shows a sub-liquid crystal a208 with special figure 1 retention number aa1, special figure 1 4th symbol aa2, special figure 2 retention number aa3, special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, ordinary figure retention number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 150 (b) following FIG. 150 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, a balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Another part of the display f1 is displayed so as to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string “Morning is in the morning” and a pattern of a fine mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a face image of the character and the temple. This corresponds to the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 150 (c) following FIG. 150 (b) shows a part of the balloon display f 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other part of the balloon display f 1 in the sub liquid crystal a 208 facing upward simultaneously. The moving animation which moves is displayed and it has shown the state stopped and displayed in the screen center of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208.

  FIG. 150 (d) following FIG. 150 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 displayed above the balloon display f 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 150 (e) following FIG. 150 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h 110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a part of the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string “morning weather is” and a cloudy mark pattern are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image of the frog character The character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the speech balloon correspond to this.

  FIG. 150 (f) following FIG. 150 (e) shows a balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen while moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal b208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 150 (g) following FIG. 150 (f) shows that the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position overlapping a part of the balloon display f 1 and a part of f 2. It is displayed.

  FIG. 150 (h) following FIG. 150 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h 110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part displaying a character string “Afternoon weather is” and a rain mark pattern, and another part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of the princess character and the princess. This corresponds to the character image of “Princess” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 150 (i) following FIG. 150 (h) shows a balloon display f 3 that appears from the bottom of the screen while a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f 2 moves upward is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal a208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a) to 151 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 151 (a) shows a sub-liquid crystal a208 with a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure hold number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 151 (b) following FIG. 151 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that f1 appears. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 151 (c) following FIG. 151 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 151 (d) following FIG. 151 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  151 (e) following FIG. 151 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (f) following FIG. 151 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen is displayed upward. The moving animation which moves toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 151 (f), FIG. 151 (g) shows that in the decorative symbol display device 208, scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are displayed. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping each other, indicating a state in which a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (h) following FIG. 151 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the already erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear reduced in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  151 (i) following FIG. 151 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously performs an animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3, and the sub-liquid crystal b208 displays the balloon display f1. Is moved downward, and a balloon display is displayed in the lower part of the sub liquid crystal b208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is filled with the balloon display, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may make it erase a half balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed. In this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. You may comprise so that it may become larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may comprise so that it may become the same magnitude | size.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
152 (a) to 152 (m) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows the sub-liquid crystal a208 with a special figure 1 holding number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure holding number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  152 (b) following FIG. 152 (a) is based on the character at the bottom of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 152 (c) following FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b 208.

  FIG. 152 (d) following FIG. 152 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 8—decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 152 (e) following FIG. 152 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In FIG. 152 (f) following FIG. 152 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen faces upward. A moving animation that moves is performed. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 152 (g) following FIG. 152 (f), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 152 (h) following FIG. 152 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 152 (i) following FIG. 152 (h) shows a state where “decoration 2—decoration 8—decoration 9” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In FIG. 152 (h), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208 even while the decorative symbol is stopped, and the balloon display f3 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. .

  In FIG. 152 (j) following FIG. 152 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub-liquid crystal b208 scrolls the balloon displays f1 to f3. Is ongoing.

  In FIG. 152 (k) following FIG. 152 (j), the sub-liquid crystal b208 continues to display the balloon displays f1 to f3, and the balloon display f6 appears from the bottom of the screen. Yes. The balloon display f6 is a character image of “Chibi princess” displayed on the face image of the Chibi princess character and the face image of the Chibi princess character, and a character string of “evening weather” and “reach?” It is a display including a balloon part on which a pattern of clear marks is displayed. The balloon display f6 in this example is a display used as a notice that the reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

  152 (l) following FIG. 152 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. The scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated at the stage where the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed.

  FIG. 152 (m) following FIG. 152 (l) shows a state where the reach effect of “decoration 4” is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of variations. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-liquid crystal may continue to produce the balloon display effect.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  FIG. 153 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 153 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 153 (i) to (k) are performed after FIGS. 153 (a) to (h), and FIG. 153 (i ′) after FIGS. 153 (a) to (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs production | production of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (a) to (k).

  FIG. 153 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 153 (b) following FIG. 153 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 153 (c) following FIG. 153 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 153 (d) following FIG. 153 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 153 (e) following FIG. 153 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more of the same balloon display may continue.

  In FIG. 153 (f) following FIG. 153 (e), a moving animation is performed in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 153 (g) following FIG. 153 (f) shows the chance button 136 at a position where the scroll display of the two balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the both balloon displays f1. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 153 (h), following FIG. 153 (g), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and immediately before the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Also, a balloon display f1b appears from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f1b includes the face image of the Tono character and the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character. It is a display that includes a speech balloon that displays a character string and a pattern that are visible and below are wisdom but foolish. The balloon portion of the balloon display f1b is a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 153 (i) following FIG. 153 (h) shows a state where the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 153 (j) following FIG. 153 (i) shows a state where the balloon display f1b is being scrolled.

  FIG. 153 (k) following FIG. 153 (j) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 153 (i ′) following FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (h) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon part f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon part f1b may stop once or a plurality of times.

  FIG. 153 (j ′) following FIG. 153 (i ′) is a button notice display h110 simulating the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation expiration date display indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state where h112 is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 153 (k ′) following FIG. 153 (j ′), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon part f1b is resumed. The

  FIG. 153 (l ′) following FIG. 153 (k ′) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scrolling display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings “when all are placed on a person look stupid but wisdom and what is below is wisdom but stupidly look.” There may be a case where is scroll-displayed and a case where all are not scroll-displayed. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (g) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 154 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 154 (b) following FIG. 154 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed so as to appear simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is displayed. . The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 154 (c) following FIG. 154 (b) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 appear simultaneously from the right end of the screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 and move to the left at the same speed. It is displayed. Two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In the upper and lower balloon displays f1, an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is started.

  FIG. 154 (d) following FIG. 154 (c) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 154 (e) following FIG. 154 (d) is an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 154 (f) following FIG. 154 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state immediately before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the change notice or the prefetch notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice that is not used for the change notice or the prefetch notice, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  FIG. 154 (g) following FIG. 154 (f) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state after being erased is shown. Thereafter, an SP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that have started to be displayed at the same time have ended simultaneously, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at the end, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. In addition, the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that have started to be displayed at the same time are ended simultaneously. However, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be ended before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be faster than the other.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 to 155 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, two examples of a balloon display effect example will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 155 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, it is impossible to visually recognize the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 155 (b) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 155 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, there may be a case where the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2 can be simultaneously viewed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 155 again.

  (E1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 105), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 105), first light emitting means (For example, light-emitting diodes a22, a32, and a33) (for example, see FIG. 105), second light-emitting means (for example, light-emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, and a24) and (for example, see FIG. 105). A gaming machine, wherein the first movable means is means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 105), and the first movable means is means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 105), and the first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 105), and in the first state, The second light emitting means Is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106B), and in the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means. (For example, refer to FIG. 106 (d)), the light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (for example, FIG. 106). (See (b) and (d)), the light emission mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (for example, FIG. 106 (b), ( d))).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(E2) The gaming machine according to e1, wherein, in the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 106 (b)), and in the first state, A game table, wherein the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106 (b)).

(E3) The gaming table according to e1 or e2, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 112 (c) )), A game table characterized by that.

(E4) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e3, wherein, in an initial state, the first light emitting unit overlaps the second movable unit (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)). A game stand characterized by that.

(E5) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e4, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. There is a gaming table (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (a) to (d)).

(E6) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein the first movable means includes third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 105), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third movable means. (See, for example, FIG. 106 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)). A game stand characterized by that.

(E7) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 105), A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)).

(E8) The gaming machine according to e7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 106 (d)). To play.

(E9) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)). ) In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)).

(E10) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 106 (b)).

(E11) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, FIG. 106 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by that.

(E12) The game table according to any one of e1 to e11, including a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), and the substrate emits the first light emission. And a substrate having both the second light emitting means (example

For example, see FIG. 105 (b)), the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)).
, A game stand characterized by that.

(E13) The game table according to any one of e1 to e12, comprising a game board (for example, a game board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is behind the game board. (See, eg, FIG. 112)
A game stand characterized by that.

(E14) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

  (F1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 105), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 105), first light emitting means (For example, light-emitting diodes a22, a32, and a33) (for example, see FIG. 105), second light-emitting means (for example, light-emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, and a24) and (for example, see FIG. 105). A gaming machine, wherein the first movable means is means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 105), and the first movable means is means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG.

The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 105). In the first state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means One of them overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106 (b)). In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means. The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, cover portion 90a3) without overlapping with the means (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)) (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)). ), The second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), a gaming table.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2) The gaming machine according to f1, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 106 (b)), and in the first state, A game table, wherein the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106 (b)).

(F3) The gaming table according to f1 or f2, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 112 (c) )), A game table characterized by that.

(F4) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f3, wherein, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)). A game stand characterized by that.

(F5) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. There is a gaming table (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (a) to (d)).

(F6) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein the first movable means includes third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 105), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third movable means. (See, for example, FIG. 106 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)). A game stand characterized by that.

(F7) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 105), A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)).

(F8) The game table according to f7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)). To play.

(F9) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein the first movable means is means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, FIG. 105 ( (b)), in the initial state, the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the second cover (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)), a gaming table.

(F10) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 106 (b)).

(F11) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, FIG. 106 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by that.

(F12) The game table according to any one of f1 to f11, including a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), and the substrate emits the first light emission. And the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), and the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)). ), A game table characterized by that.
(F13)

  The game table according to any one of f1 to f12, comprising a game board (for example, a game board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is operable behind the game board. A game table characterized by that (see, for example, FIG. 112).

(F14) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

  (G1) A game machine including first movable means (for example, movable body 1) and second movable means (for example, movable body 1), wherein the first movable means is a first (For example, see FIG. 102 (c)), and the second movable means has a second action (for example, a downward movement). The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 102 (a)). )), And the position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 104C). ), A game table characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(G2) The gaming machine according to g1, wherein the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (See, for example, FIG. 104 (c)).

  There are cases where the appearance of the second movable means can be changed during execution of the second operation.

(G3) The game machine according to g1 or g2, wherein at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction. A game table characterized in that the other part of the game is visible from the front.
In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed.

(G4) The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g3, comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the position of the display means is the one that has executed the second operation. A game table that is located behind the position of the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 104 (c)).
In some cases, the appearance of the display means can be changed.

(G5) The gaming machine according to g4, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string “please remove the ball”) (for example, FIG. 104 (b)), at least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (for example, FIG. 104 (c)). )), A game table characterized by that.
In some cases, the appearance of the first error display can be changed.

(G6) The gaming machine according to g5, wherein the first error display is a ball-free display (for example, see FIG. 104 (b)).
In some cases, the appearance of the ball-free display can be changed.

(G7) The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8) The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first motion may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first motion may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component. The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first operation may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component. -Both a 1st operation | movement and a 2nd operation | movement may be performed simultaneously, the other may be performed after one is performed, and only one or the other may be performed. After both the first operation and the second operation are performed, both the first movable means and the second movable means may return to the initial position at the same time, and after one returns, the other returns Also good. -While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate. -During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means. -During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means. -Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or even if it performs the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means Good.

(H1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 105), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 105), first light emitting means (For example, light-emitting diodes a22, a32, and a33) (for example, see FIG. 105), second light-emitting means (for example, light-emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, and a24) and (for example, see FIG. 105). A gaming machine, wherein the first movable means is means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 105), and the first movable means is means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 105), and the first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 105), and in the first state, Of the second light emitting means One of them overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106 (b)). In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means. In an initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is a structure (for example, the structure 30a). A gaming table characterized by being overlapped with each other (for example, see FIG. 112 (a)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(H2) The gaming machine according to h1, wherein, in the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 106 (b)), and in the first state, A game table, wherein the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 106 (b)).

(H3) The gaming table according to h1 or h2, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 112 (c) )), A game table characterized by that.

(H4) The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h3, wherein, in an initial state, the first light emitting unit overlaps the second movable unit (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)). A game stand characterized by that.

(H5) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h4, wherein the first light emitting unit is a unit capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. There is a gaming table (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (a) to (d)).

(H6) The game machine according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein the first movable means includes third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 105), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third movable means. (See, for example, FIG. 106 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)). A game stand characterized by that.

(H7) The game machine according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 105), A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 106 (a)).

(H8) The gaming machine according to h7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 106 (d)). To play.

(H9) The game machine according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3), and in the initial state, the first A game table characterized in that the light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover (see, for example, FIG. 106 (a)).

(H10) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 106 (b))
A game stand characterized by that.

(H11) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, FIG. 106 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by that.

(H12) The game machine according to any one of h1 to h11, including a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), and the substrate emits the first light emission. And the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)), and the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)). ), A game table characterized by that.

(H13) The game table according to any one of h1 to h12, including a game board (for example, a game board 125) having game nails, wherein the first movable means is located behind the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means that can be operated at (for example, see FIG. 112).

(H14) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(I1) A game machine including display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a structure (for example, a structure 247), wherein the display means has a first position (for example, a display area) (For example, see FIG. 114C), and at least a part of the structure is a part of the display means. The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, see FIG. 114). 114 (c)).

  In some cases, the player can be provided with the pleasure of playing by changing the direction of viewing the game platform, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I2) The gaming machine according to i1, wherein the structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 123), and the first display displayed at the first position is A game table, wherein the display is a display that does not overlap the structure after the structure is moved.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I3) The gaming machine according to i1 or i2, wherein the display unit is a movable display unit (see, for example, FIGS. 385 to 391), and the first unit displayed at the first position Is a display that does not overlap the structure after the display means is moved.

In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I4) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display region). The gaming table is characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 114 (e)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I5) The gaming machine according to i4, wherein the first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 114). A game table that features

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I6) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein the first display is a notice display (for example, see FIG. 114).

In some cases, the appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I7) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8) The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display It may be a character display or an error display. The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure. The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the display means is moved. -A structure may be provided with a display means, may be provided with a LED board, and may be movable. -The display means may be movable. The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the display of the transmissive liquid crystal display. -The light emitting panel may be sufficient as a structure, and a 1st display may be performed back during the light emission display of a light emission panel.

  (Drawing) ・ Example where the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps with the structure to the second position where it does not overlap ・ No notice where the notice display overlaps with the structure from the first position Example of moving to the first position again after moving to the second position-The notice display overlaps with the other structure after moving from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap Example of moving to the third position and moving to the fifth position that does not overlap after moving from the fourth position to the first position where it overlaps from the fourth position Visible example-Announcement display is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure, and other advance notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap-Announcement The indication is displayed at the second position and the other notice display moves to the first position.The notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, An example where the effect display can be seen first ・ An example where the advance notice is displayed before the advance notice is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure ・ An example where the advance notice appears enlarged ・ The second notice display An example in which the notice of the second position is hidden by moving the structure or the display means.

  (J1) A game machine having display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons, One of the icons is a hold icon, and an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation” (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. In some cases, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous variation) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the first animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 125). A characteristic game stand.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2) The gaming machine according to j1, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3) The gaming machine according to j1 or j2, wherein the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 134 (f) and (g)). A game stand characterized by that.
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j3, wherein the first animation is an animation including a movement display of the icon (for example, FIG. 125 (f) to ( i) see)).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5) The game machine according to any one of j1 to j4, wherein the first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icons (for example, FIG. 125 (f), ( g))).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j5, wherein the first animation is an animation including an increased display of the icons (for example, FIG. 125 (j), ( k))).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7) The gaming machine according to j6, wherein the increased display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (for example, see FIG. 129).
There are cases where the behavior of one icon can be more enjoyed.

(J8) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j7, wherein the first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 125 (h )), A game table characterized by that.
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j8, wherein the first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 131 (j) reference),
A game stand characterized by that.
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display. .
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.
(J11)

  The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j10, wherein the first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, special figure 1, hold icon display area 208ab). Displayed (for example, FIG. 126 (f

)), And at least a part of the display period of the first animation, there may be a case where another display (for example, an icon displaying a character string “in preparation”) is displayed in the icon display area. There is a gaming table (see, for example, FIG. 126 (g)).
In some cases, the player's attention can be gathered in the display of the icon display area.

(J12) The game machine according to any one of j1 to j11, wherein an animation by two or more icons (hereinafter referred to as “second animation”) is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. In some cases (for example, see FIG. 134 (f)), the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the second animation is displayed (for example, FIG. 134 (h)). A game table characterized by that.
There are cases where the behavior of two or more icons can be more enjoyed.

(J13) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  -The icon may move and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons may be moved (packed) and displayed. May be. -When the icon is moved and displayed again (returned display) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or another icon display May be displayed to dismiss.・ The decorative design may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), the display may change from shaking display to change display, or the special design is temporarily stopped on the middle design. Also good. -The 1st production display does not need to be performed after the 1st animation. -The first animation may be performed a plurality of times during one decoration symbol variation display. -A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. -An icon with high expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with low expectation, or vice versa. The first animation may be easier in the case of the reserved full tank than in the case of the reserved non-full tank, or vice versa. -A notice display may be made to suggest that the first animation will be performed. -A count notice display (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed. The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is digested. The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

  (Drawings) FIG. 125 to FIG. 134 are examples in which the hold icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variation display is re-variable (pseudo-continuous) during fluctuation variation of the off symbol. FIG. 126 is an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on a holding base while the holding icon is moving. FIG. 127 shows an example of returning to the original position when the back hold icon is packed back while the hold icon is moving. FIG. 128 is an example of a gaze effect that does not develop even if the hold icon hits. FIG. 129 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one change. FIG. 130 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation with one change. FIG. 131 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon. FIG. 132 is an example in which the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. FIG. 133 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with a plurality of variations and develops to reach. FIG. 134 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative design at the same time and reach.

(K1) A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one display of the plurality of displays is The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 136 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is the second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 136 (f)), while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, FIG. 136 ( e)), and there is a case where at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display overlap (for example, refer to FIG. 136 (e)).

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing his / her line of sight, the player can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2) The game machine according to k1, wherein the display means refers to a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (for example, see FIGS. 136 (d) and (e)), and after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation is displayed. There is a case (for example, see FIG. 136 (d), (e)), a game table characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3) The gaming machine according to k2, wherein the display unit is referred to as a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left). ), And after the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 136 (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4) The game machine according to k2 or k3, wherein the other moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third moving animation” (for example, moving animation that moves to the right)). After the display, the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 136 (b) and (c)), and the first movement animation and the third movement animation are A game table characterized in that the direction of movement of one balloon display may be different (see, for example, FIG. 136).

There are cases in which the player's expectation can be enhanced by changing the direction of movement by moving animation.
(K5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k4, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, FIG. 136 (e )), A game table characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6) The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k5, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display ( For example, see FIG. 136 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.
There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7) The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k6, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono), and the second balloon display is The display includes a character (for example, a character of Tono), and the character in the first balloon display may be the same as the character in the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 153 (f) and (g)). , A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(K8) The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k7, comprising operating means (for example, a chance button 136), wherein the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 136 (d) and 136 (e)).
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(K9) The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10) The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence. The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half. -It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation). When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially. A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display. -A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. -A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display. The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.
(Drawing)

  FIG. 135 is an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 136 is an example of a conversation notice. The appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is vertical movement (a new balloon animation and an old balloon animation simultaneously). FIG. 137 is an example of the conversation announcement / appearance animation is moved horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is moved vertically (timing modification / animation of old balloon after animation of old balloon). FIG. 138 is an example of a conversation notice / animation that appears horizontally, and an animation that appears when a new speech balloon appears, which is a vertical movement (an example of timing variation / an animation of an old speech balloon after a new speech balloon animation). FIG. 139 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which the appearance animation is vertically moved, and the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double. FIG. 140 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes after returning. FIG. 141 is an example in which a specific notice balloon (for example, a balloon with a high expectation) is not deleted. FIG. 142 is an example of conversation notices / balloons overlapping. FIG. 143 is an example of a conversation announcement / an old speech balloon is reduced. FIG. 144 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which speech balloons of the same character continue, an example in which the speech balloons expand, and an example in which the speech balloon contents protrude from the speech balloons. FIG. 145 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while the notice character is moving. FIG. 146 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the movable body is in operation. FIG. 147 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light. FIG. 148 is an example in which a speech balloon moves while the first display is displayed as an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 149 is an example of a conversation notice / an example of a balloon prefetch notice (a change from a hold icon to a prefetch icon). FIG. 150 shows an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on different display means. FIG. 151 is an example of a conversation notice / balloon moving to another display means. FIG. 152 is an example in which a conversation announcement example / balloon is displayed over a plurality of variations.

(L1) A gaming machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one display of the plurality of displays is The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 136 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is the second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 136 (f)), while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, FIG. 136 ( e)), while the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (for example, see FIGS. 136 (e) and (f)). A game stand characterized by that.

  By displaying the first balloon display in a separate display area while the second balloon display is displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that he can concentrate on the game, Can be improved.

(L2) The gaming machine according to l1, wherein the display means refers to a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (for example, see FIGS. 136 (d) and (e)), and after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation is displayed. There is a case (for example, see FIG. 136 (d), (e)), a game table characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3) The gaming machine according to l1 or l2, wherein the display means moves the second balloon display movement animation (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, movement animation that moves to the left). The second balloon display is displayed after the second moving animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 136 (f)). Stand.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4) In the gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l3, at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, FIG. 136 (e)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5) In the gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l4, at least a part of the first balloon display may be overlapped with at least a part of the second balloon display ( For example, see FIG. 136 (e)).
There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(L6) The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l5, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono), and the second balloon display is The display includes a character (for example, a character of Tono), and the character in the first balloon display may be the same as the character in the second balloon display (for example, see FIGS. 153 (f) and (g)). , A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(L7) The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l6, comprising operating means (for example, a chance button 136), wherein the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 136 (d) and 136 (e)).
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(L8) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l7, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, FIG. 139 (q)), while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 139 (n)), The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same, and the width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 139 (q)). ), A game table characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's expectation can be enhanced by varying the width of the balloon display.

(L9) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10) The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence. The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half. -It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation). When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially. A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display. -A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. -A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display. The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, when the contents described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in any example of the above embodiment are applied to the configuration of another example, the range of games can be expanded. There is.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 160 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 227 Meter increase entrance 228 Universal drawing start port 230 First special figure start 232 Second special drawing start port 234, 235 Variable prize opening 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 418 Various lamps 500 Second sub control unit

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an effect setting display, and the effect setting display is a display including one or more settings. In the display of the effect setting display, a display including one setting (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) can be displayed on the display means separately from the effect setting display being displayed. der is, the effect setting display may include a set of the 1, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is means capable of displaying an effect setting display (for example, an effect customization screen shown in FIG. 25, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, and a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19). This is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, item setting shown in FIG. 25, volume setting shown in FIG. 22, luminance setting shown in FIG. 19). In addition to the effect setting display in the middle, a display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, setting of item A shown in FIGS. 23 and 25). Show, give item Characterized suggesting Display (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) Ri displayable der on the display means, the rendering setup display may include a set of the 1, it that It is a game stand.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the effect setting display in display case is containing 1 configuration, apart from the effect setting display in the display, capable of displaying a first display including a first set Therefore, when the first display is displayed, the player can be expected to increase the number of settings included in the effect setting display, and the player's interest may be improved .

In addition, there is provided count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 11 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases, and the count display means displays a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as a count display). , “First count display”, for example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 11C, and a character display CD2 of “full” shown in FIG. and when it becomes the first display may that appears on the display unit, display by said count indication means may be changeable display during the display non-symbol variation.

Further, when the display of the count display device becomes the first count display, there is a case where the second display in place of the first display still appears on the display unit, the second display The display may indicate a notice (for example, display of an item image IG including a character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 14 (m), etc.).

Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, settings that can be selected in the effect setting display after the first display is erased (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 25) increase. You may do.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an effect setting display, and the effect setting display is a display including one or more settings. In the display of the effect setting display, a display including one setting (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) can be displayed on the display means separately from the effect setting display being displayed. When the first display is displayed on the display means, the first setting included in the first display may be displayed in the effect setting display being displayed. It is a game stand.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying an effect setting display (for example, an effect customization screen shown in FIG. 26 , a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, and a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19). This is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, item setting shown in FIG. 25, volume setting shown in FIG. 22, luminance setting shown in FIG. 19). Apart from the effect setting display in the inside, a display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example , setting of item A shown in FIG. 26. For example , an item shown in FIG . Suggest Display (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) and can be displayed on the display means, when the first display is displayed on the display means, in the rendering setup display during the display, There is a case in which the one setting included in the first display may be displayed .

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the effect setting display in the display that when there is the first set is displayed, separately from the effect setting display in the display, the first display including a first set Since it can be displayed, the player can be expected to increase the number of settings included in the effect setting display by displaying the first display, and the player's interest may be improved. is there.

Claims (9)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect setting display,
The production setting display is a display including one or more settings,
During the display of the effect setting display, a display including one setting (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) can be displayed on the display means separately from the effect setting display being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
A counting display means capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases,
When the display of the count display means becomes a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as “first count display”), the first display is displayed on the display means,
The display by the count display means is a display that can be changed during the non-design variation display period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
When the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means,
The second display is a display showing a notice,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
When the display of the count display means is the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
With operating means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation display”) during the display of the first display.
The first operation display is a display including an effective period display of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
When the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
When the first display is displayed on the display means, selectable settings in the effect setting display increase.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.